Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
- Description
- Reference Page Command Syntax
- bldc_dce(1)
- blds_dce(1)
- buildclient(1)
- buildmqadapter(1)
- buildnetclient(1)
- buildobjclient(1)
- buildobjserver(1)
- buildserver(1)
- buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
- buildtms(1)
- buildwsh(1)
- cobcc(1)
- cpy2record
- dmadmin(1)
- dmloadcf(1)
- dmunloadcf(1)
- gencat(1)
- genicf(1)
- idl(1)
- idl2ir(1)
- ir2idl(1)
- irdel(1)
- mkfldcs, mkfldcs32(1)
- mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
- mklanginfo(1)
- qmadmin(1)
- qmadmin Commands
- rex(1)
- tlisten(1)
- tlistpwd(1)
- tmadmin(1)
- tmadmin Commands
- tmboot(1)
- tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
- tmunloadcf Compatibility
- tmipcrm(1)
- tmloadcf(1)
- tmloadrepos(1)
- TMS_rac_refresh(1)
- tmshutdown(1)
- tmunloadcf(1)
- tmunloadrepos(1)
- tpacladd(1)
- tpaclcvt(1)
- tpacldel(1)
- tpaclmod(1)
- tpaddusr(1)
- tmchgpwd(1)
- tpdelusr(1)
- tpgrpadd(1)
- tpgrpdel(1)
- tpgrpmod(1)
- tpkill(1)
- tpldapconf(1)
- tpmigldap(1)
- tpmodusr(1)
- tpusradd(1)
- tpusrdel(1)
- tpusrmod(1)
- txrpt(1)
- ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
- viewc, viewc32(1)
- viewcs, viewcs32(1)
- viewdis, viewdis32(1)
Parent topic: Section 1 - Commands
Description
The Oracle Tuxedo Command Reference describes, in alphabetic order, shell-level commands delivered with the Oracle Tuxedo software.
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Reference Page Command Syntax
Unless otherwise noted, commands described in the Synopsis section of a reference page accept options and other arguments according to the following syntax and must be interpreted as explained below.
-
name [ -option . . . ] [cmdarg . . . ]
- where
name
is the name of an executable file andoption
is a string of one of the following two types:noargletter . . .
orargletter optarg
[, . . .] -
noargletter
- A single letter representing an
option
that requires no option-argument. More than onenoargletter
can be grouped after a “-
” -
optarg
- A character string that satisfies a preceding
argletter
. Multipleoptargs
following a singleargletter
must be separated by commas, or separated by white space and enclosed in quotes. -
cmdarg
- A pathname (or other command argument) that represents an operand of the command.
-
-
- (dash) By itself means that additional arguments are provided in the standard input.
-
--
- (two dashes) Means that what follows are arguments for a subordinate program.
-
[ ]
- Surrounding an
option
orcmdarg
, mean that the option or argument is not required. -
{ }
- Surrounding
cmdargs
that are separated by anor
sign, mean that one of the choices must be selected if the associated option is used. - . . .
- Means that multiple occurrences of the
option
orcmdarg
are permitted.
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
bldc_dce(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
bldc_dce
—Builds an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI client
that can be called via OSF/DCE
.
Parent topic: bldc_dce(1)
Synopsis
blds_dce [-o output_file] [-i idl_options] [-f firstfiles]
[-l lastfiles] [idl_file . . .]
Parent topic: bldc_dce(1)
Description
bldc_dce
parses any input IDL and related ACF
source files and combines them with C source and object files and
the OSF/DCE
libraries to generate an Oracle Tuxedo
ATMI client that can be called through DCE
RPC
(it is a DCE
RPC
client).
The command line arguments include the input IDL source file and options to control the actions of the IDL compiler. The options are as follows:
-
-o
output_file
- The default filename is
a.out
. -
-i idl_options
- Specifies options to be passed to the IDL compiler. Options
associated with the C compilation system are automatically provided
by this program. This option can be used to provide the
-no_mepv
option such that the application can provide a Manager Entry Point Vector. -
-f firstfiles
- Specifies compiler options, C source and object files to be
included on the compilation before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system
and
OSF/DCE
libraries. -
-l lastfiles
- Specifies C libraries to be included on the compilation after
the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system and
OSF/DCE
libraries.
Parent topic: bldc_dce(1)
blds_dce(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
blds_dce [-o output_file] [-i idl_options] [-f firstfiles]
[-l lastfiles] [-s service] [idl_file . . .]
Parent topic: blds_dce(1)
Description
blds_dce
parses any input IDL and related ACF source files and combines them with C source and object files and the OSF/DCE
libraries to generate an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server that can make DCE RPC
calls. The primary use of this command is to make an Oracle Tuxedo system-to-OSF/DCE
gateway process.
-
-ooutput_file
- The default filename is
a.out
. -
-iidl_options
- Specifies options to be passed to the IDL compiler. Options associated with the C compilation system are automatically provided by this program. This option can be used to provide the
-no_mepv
option such that the application can provide a Manager Entry Point Vector. -
-f firstfiles
- Specifies compiler options, C source and object files to be included on the compilation before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system and
OSF/DCE
libraries. -
-l lastfiles
- Specifies C libraries to be included on the compilation after the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system and
OSF/DCE
libraries -
-s services [,service ...]
- Specifies the services to be advertised by the server.
Parent topic: blds_dce(1)
buildclient(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
buildclient [ -C ] [ -v ] [ {-r rmname | -w } ] [ -oname]
[ -f firstfiles] [ -l lastfiles] [ -k ]
Parent topic: buildclient(1)
Description
buildclient
is used to construct an Oracle Tuxedo
ATMI client module. The command combines the files supplied by the
-f
and -l
options with the standard
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries to form a load module. The load module
is built by buildclient
using the default C language
compilation command defined for the operating system in use. The
default C language compilation command for the UNIX system is the
cc
(1) command described in UNIX system reference
manuals.
-
-v
- Specifies that
buildclient
must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes the compilation command to its standard output. -
-w
- Specifies that the client is to be built using the workstation
libraries. The default is to build a native client if both native
mode and workstation mode libraries are available. This option
cannot be used with the
-r
option. -
-r rmname
- Specifies the resource manager associated with this client. The
value
rmname
must appear in the resource manager table located in$TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
. Each line in this file is of the form: -
-o
- Specifies the filename of the output load module. If not
supplied, the load module is named
a.out
. -
-f
- Specifies one or more user files to be included in the
compilation and link edit phases of
buildclient
first, before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. This option may be specified multiple times. TheCFLAGS
andALTCFLAGS
environment variables, described below, must be used to include any compiler options and their arguments. -
-l
- Specifies one or more user files to be included in the
compilation and link edit phases of
buildclient
last, after the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. This option may be specified multiple times. -
-C
- Specifies COBOL compilation.
-
-k
- Keeps the COBOL client stub.
buildclient
generates a stub with data structures such as the function table invoked in COBOL program. This is normally compiled and then removed when the client is built. This option indicates that the source file must be kept (to see what the source filename is, use the -v option). This option is valid only when-C
option is specified and the environment variableCOB
is set to “AcuCobol
”.
Parent topic: buildclient(1)
Environment Variables
-
TUXDIR
-
buildclient
uses the environment variableTUXDIR
to find the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries andinclude
files to use during compilation of the client process. -
CC
-
buildclient
normally uses the default C language compilation command to produce the client executable. The default C language compilation command is defined for each supported operating system platform and is defined ascc
(1) for UNIX system. In order to allow for the specification of an alternate compiler,buildclient
checks for the existence of an environment variable namedCC
. IfCC
does not exist inbuildclient
’s environment, or if it is the string""
,buildclient
will use the default C language compiler. IfCC
does exist in the environment, its value is taken to be the name of the compiler to be executed. -
CFLAGS
- The environment variable
CFLAGS
is taken to contain a set of arguments to be passed as part of the compiler command line. This is in addition to the command line option “-I${TUXDIR}/include
” passed automatically bybuildclient
. IfCFLAGS
does not exist inbuildclient
’s environment, or if it is the string""
, no compiler command line arguments are added bybuildclient
. -
ALTCC
- When the
-C
option is specified for COBOL compilation,buildclient
normally uses the Oracle Tuxedo shellcobcc
which in turn callscob
to produce the client executable. In order to allow for the specification of an alternate compiler,buildclient
checks for the existence of an environment variable namedALTCC
. IfALTCC
does not exist inbuildclient
’s environment, or if it is the string""
,buildclient
usescobcc
. IfALTCC
does exist in the environment, its value is taken to be the name of the compiler command to be executed. -
ALTCFLAGS
- The environment variable
ALTCFLAGS
is taken to contain a set of additional arguments to be passed as part of the COBOL compiler command line when the-C
option is specified. This is in addition to the command line option: -
COBOPT
- The environment variable
COBOPT
is taken to contain a set of additional arguments to be used by the COBOL compiler, when the-C
option is specified. -
COBCPY
- The environment variable
COBCPY
indicates which directories contain a set of COBOL copy files to be used by the COBOL compiler, when the-C
option is specified. -
TM_COB_STATIC
- The environment variable
TM_COB_STATIC
indicates whether shared version or static versionlibcobatmi
library to be linked bybuildclient
. The environment variable value may be “Yes
” or “No
”. If “Yes
” is set, static versionlibcobatmi
library is used; otherwise shared version is used. If the environment variable is not specified, the shared versionlibcobatmi
library is used by default. -
COB
- The environment variable
COB
indicates which COBOL compiler is used. It supports two parameters:AcuCobol
andIBMCobol
. -
TM_COB_VERSION
- The environment variable
TM_COB_VERSION
indicates the ACUCOBOL compiler version. This environment variable takes effect only when-C
option is specified and the environment variableCOB
is set to “AcuCobol
”. The value format of the environment variable is “[0-9]+\.[0-9]
”.- If
TM_COB_VERSION
value is less than7.0
,buildclient
generates old style ACUCOBOL stub code; otherwisebuildclient
generates new style ACUCOBOL stub code. - If
TM_COB_VERSION
is not set,buildclient
generates new style ACUCOBOL stub code by default.
- If
-
TM_COB_CC_FILES
- When ACUCOBOL compiler is used, only COBOL source files can be
specified with
-f
option. If there are other user files to be passed tocc(1)
in the compilation and link edit phases ofbuildclient
first, before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries, these files must be specified with the environment variableTM_COB_CC_FILES
. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. The environment variable takes effect only when-C
option is specified and the environment variableCOB
is set to “AcuCobol
”. -
ACUCOBOL
- When ACUCOBOL is used for COBOL compilation, the environment
variable
ACUCOBOL
indicates the ACUCOBOL installed directory so that ACUCOBOL system libraries and files can be found during the client compilation. -
IBMCOBOL
- When IBMCOBOL is used for COBOL compilation, the environment variable IBMCOBOL indicates the IBMCOBOL installed directory so that IBMCOBOL system libraries and files can be found during the client compilation.
-
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
(UNIX systems) - The environment variable
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
indicates which directories contain shared objects to be used by the COBOL compiler, in addition to the Oracle Tuxedo system shared objects. Some UNIX systems require different environment variables: for HP-UX systems, use theSHLIB_PATH
environment variable; for AIX, useLIBPATH
. -
LIB
(Windows NT systems) - Indicates a list of directories within which to find libraries. A semicolon (;) is used to separate the list of directories.
Parent topic: buildclient(1)
Portability
The buildclient
compilation tool is supported on
the following platforms:
- Any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported
- Any Workstation platform running a 32-bit Windows operating system
Filenames specified in the buildclient
command line
must conform to the syntax and semantics of the resident operating
system.
Parent topic: buildclient(1)
Examples
Listing 1 BUILDCLIENT COBOL Example
CC=ncc CFLAGS="-I /APPDIR/include"; export CC CFLAGS
buildclient -o empclient -f emp.c -f "userlib1.a userlib2.a"
COBCPY=$TUXDIR/cobinclude
COBOPT="-C ANS85 -C ALIGN=8 -C NOIBMCOMP -C TRUNC=ANSI -C OSEXT=cbl"
COBDIR=/usr/lib/cobol LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$COBDIR/coblib:$TUXDIR/lib
export COBOPT COBCPY COBDIR LD_LIBRARY_PATH
buildclient -C -o empclient -f name.cbl -f "userlib1.a userlib2.a"
Listing 2 BUILDCLIENT ACUCOBOL Example
TUXDIR=/opt/tuxedo10.0
TM_COB_STATIC=no
COB=AcuCobol
COBCPY=$TUXDIR/cobinclude
COBOPT="-Ca -v -w -Ga -Dw64 -Dl8 -Da8"
TM_COB_VERSION=7.2
ACUCOBOL=/opt/AcuCobol-7.2.1
TM_COB_CC_FILES="-lruncbl -lclnt -lacvt -lfsi -laregex -lacuterm -lextfh -laxml -lexpat -lvision -lesql -lacme -lz -lm"
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$ACUCOBOL/lib:$TUXDIR/lib
export TUXDIR TM_COB_STATIC COB COBCPY COBOPT TM_COB_VERSION ACUCOBOL TM_COB_CC_FILES LD_LIBRARY_PATH
buildclient -C -o CSIMPCL -f CSIMPCL.cbl
Listing 3 BUILDCLIENT IBMCOBOL Example
TUXDIR=/opt/tuxedo10.0
TM_COB_STATIC=no
COB=IBMCobol
IBMCOBOL=/usr/lpp/cobol
COBCPY=$TUXDIR/cobinclude
COBOPT="-Ca -v -w -Ga -Dw64 -Dl8 -Da8" LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$IBMCOBOL/lib:$TUXDIR/lib
export TUXDIR TM_COB_STATIC COB COBCPY COBOPT IBMCOBOL LD_LIBRARY_PATH
buildclient -C -o CSIMPCL -f CSIMPCL.cbl
See Also:
buildserver(1), buildtms(1), compilation(5) cc
(1), ld
(1) in a UNIX system reference manual.
Parent topic: buildclient(1)
buildmqadapter(1)
Description
buildmqadapter builds the TM_MQI
, TM_MQO
, and TMQUEUE_MQM
servers and installs them in $TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQI,$TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQO
, and $TUXDIR/bin/TMQUEUE_MQM
.
Note:
If the output files need to be placed in different locations, then the individual commandsbuildTM_MQI(1)
, buildTM_MQO(1)
, and buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
must be used instead.
The servers built by buildmqadapter
are used by the
Tuxedo MQ Adapter to interact with IBM WebSphere MQ as described in
the Oracle MQ Adapter for Tuxedo 11gR1 Users Guide.
The user must have permissions to create or overwrite the MQ Adapter server files.
buildmqadapter
invokes the buildserver command to
build each of the MQ Adapter servers.
Building the MQ Adapter server files using
buildmqadapter
instead of distributing prelinked
objects allows the Tuxedo administrator to configure:
- Whether the MQ adapter servers are to be linked with WebSphere MQ Server libraries or with WedSphere MQ client libraries.
- Whether the MQ adapter servers are to be linked with the dynamic XA switch MQRMIXASwitchDynamic or the static RM switch MQRMIXASwitch.
- The patch level and release of WebSphere MQ libraries to link with.
buildmqadapter
does not build the TMS server for
the MQ resource manager, and the Tuxedo administrator will need to
execute buildtms at some time in order to build the WebSphere MQ
TMS server.
Parent topic: buildmqadapter(1)
Options
-
v
- Specifies that
buildmqadapter
must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes the buildserver command to its standard output and specifies the -v option to buildserver. -
-r rm_name
- Specifies the resource manager name associated with the MQ Adapter servers. The value
rm_name
must appear in the resource manager table located at$TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
. The entry associated with therm_name
value is used to include the correct libraries for the resource manager automatically and properly to set up the interface between the transaction manager and resource manager (using thexa_switch_t structure
). The default value for this parameter isMQSeries_XA_RMI
. -
-c
- Specifies building MQ Adapter with WebSphere MQ client library.
-
-t
- Specifies building multi-threaded servers. This option only takes effect on TM_MQI server.
buildmqadapter
uses the buildserver command to produce the output files. buildserver uses the CC and CFLAGS environment variables, if set, for the compiler and compiler flags, respectively. See buildserver(1) for further details.
Parent topic: buildmqadapter(1)
buildnetclient(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
buildnetclient
—Constructs an Oracle Tuxedo
.NET Workstation Client module.
Parent topic: buildnetclient(1)
Synopsis
buildnetclient [-v] [-o outfile] [-csflag flagstring] [.cs source files] [.dll assembly files] [.netmodule module files]
Parent topic: buildnetclient(1)
Description
buildnetclient
is a utility used to construct a
Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client application. This command combines
the files specified by the .cs
source file arguments,
.dll
assembly files, and .netmodule
module files
with the Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client
wrapper libraries to form a client application. The client
application is then built using the C# compiler
(csc.exe
) provided by Microsoft’s .NET Framework
environment.
Users may specify options to be passed to the C# compiler by
setting the csflag
option.
Note:
Multiple C# compiler options can be specified. Multiple options must be enclosed with quotation marks and separated by a blank space.Parent topic: buildnetclient(1)
Options
-
-v
- Specifies that the
buildnetclient
command must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes the compile command to its standard output. -
-o outfile
- Specifies the name of the client application generated by this
command. If the name is not supplied, the application file is named
after the C# source file which has a class containing a static
method
Main
inside, and the file name extension is dependent on the operating system for an application (on a Windows system the extension would be.exe
). -
-csflag flagstring
- Indicates any arguments that are passed as part of the C# compiler command line for any files with a .cs file extension. Multiple C# compiler options may be specified if they are enclosed in quotation marks and are separated by white space.
-
.cs source
- Specifies any C# source files with a .cs file extension which are needed to build the application file.
-
.dll assembly files
- Specifies any .NET assembly files with a .dll file extension which are referenced by the files in the .cs source files list to build the application file.
-
.netmodule module files
- Specifies any .NET module files with a .netmodule file extension which are needed to build the application file.
Parent topic: buildnetclient(1)
Remarks
buildnetclient
analyzes the arguments passed to it
via command line and constructs another valid command line to
invoke the C# compiler to build the application executable.
For example, [buildnetclient -o t1.exe, t1.cs]
is translated by buildnetclient
to csc /out:t1.exe/t:exe /r:%TUXDIR%\bin\libwscdnet.dll t1.cs
on Windows system.
Parent topic: buildnetclient(1)
Examples
The following example builds two C# source files t1.cs, t2.cs and a module file t3.netmodule together into a executable assembly first.exe. In this example, t1.cs calls methods provided by a library assembly func.dll which is located in the same directory with the above files.
[buildnetclient -o first.exe func.dll t1.cs t3.netmodule t2.cs]
See Also:
Creating Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client Applications in Using the Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client.Parent topic: buildnetclient(1)
buildobjclient(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
buildobjclient [-v][-oname] [-f
firstfile
-syntax]
[-l lastfile
-syntax] -P
Parent topic: buildobjclient(1)
Description
Use the buildobjclient
command to construct a CORBA
client application. The command combines the files specified in the
-f
and -l
options with the standard CORBA
libraries to form a client application. The client application is
built using the default C++ language compile command defined for
the operating system in use.
All specified .c
and .cpp
files are
compiled in one invocation of the compilation system for the
operating system in use. Users may specify the compiler to invoke
by setting the CC
environment variable to the name of
the compiler. If the CC
environment variable is not
defined when buildobjclient
is invoked, the default
C++ language compile command for the operating system in use will
be invoked to compile all .c
and .cpp
files.
Users may specify options to be passed to the compiler by
setting the CFLAGS
or the CPPFLAGS
environment variables. If CFLAGS
is not defined when
buildobjclient
is invoked, the
buildobjclient
command uses the value of
CPPFLAGS
if that variable is defined.
Parent topic: buildobjclient(1)
Options
-
-v
- Specifies that the
buildobjclient
command must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes the compile command to its standard output. -
-o name
- Specifies the name of the client application generated by this
command. If the name is not supplied, the application file is named
client<.type>
, where type is an extension that is dependent on the operating system for an application (for example, on a UNIX system, there would not be atype
; on a Windows system, thetype
would be.EXE
). -
-f firstfile-syntax
- Specifies a file to be included first in the compile and link phases of the
buildobjclient
command. The specified file is included before the CORBA libraries are included. There are three ways of specifying a file or files, as shown in the following table.Table 1-2 Specifying the First Filename(s)
Filename Specification Definition -f firstfile
One file is specified -f "file.cpp file2.cpp file3.cpp ... "
Multiple files may be specified if names are enclosed in quotation marks and are separated by white space. Note:
- Filenames that include spaces are not supported.
- The
-f
option may be specified multiple times.
-
-l lastfile-syntax
- Specifies a file to be included last in the compile and link phases of the
buildobjclient
command. The specified file is included after the CORBA libraries are included. There are three ways of specifying a file, as shown in the following table.Table 1-3 Specifying the Last Filename(s)
Filename Specification Definition -l lastfile
One file is specified. -l "file.cpp file2.cpp file3.cpp ... "
Multiple files may be specified if their names are enclosed in quotation marks and are separated by white space. -
-P
- Specifies that the appropriate POA libraries must be linked
into the image (that is, libraries that allow a client to also
function as a server). The resulting image can act as a server and
can use the
Callbacks
wrapper class for creating objects. The resulting joint client/server cannot take advantage of the object state management and transaction management provided by the Oracle Tuxedo TP Framework. The-P
switch must have been passed to the IDL compiler when generating the client. Usebuildobjserver
to build a server with all the support provided by the TP Framework. The default is to not link in the server libraries; that is, the default is to create a client only, not a joint client/server. -
-h or -?
- Provides help that explains the usage of the
buildobjclient
command. No other action results.
Parent topic: buildobjclient(1)
Environment Variables
-
TUXDIR
- Finds the CORBA libraries and include files to use when compiling the client applications.
-
CC
- Indicates the compiler to use to compile all files with
.c
or.cpp
file extensions. If not defined, the default C++ language compile command for the operating system in use will be invoked to compile all.c
and.cpp
files. -
CFLAGS
- Indicates any arguments that are passed as part of the compiler
command line for any files with a
.c
or.cpp
file extensions. IfCFLAGS
does not exist in thebuildobjclient
command environment, thebuildobjclient
command checks for theCPPFLAGS
environment variable. -
CPPFLAGS
-
Note:
Arguments passed by theCFLAGS
environment variable take priority over theCPPFLAGS
variable. -
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
(UNIX systems) - Indicates which directories contain shared objects to be used
by the compiler, in addition to the objects shared by the CORBA
software. A colon (:) is used to separate the list of directories.
Some UNIX systems require different environment variables: for
HP-UX systems, use the
SHLIB_PATH
environment variable; for AIX, useLIBPATH
. -
LIB
- Indicates a list of directories within which to find libraries. A semicolon (;) is used to separate the list of directories.
Parent topic: buildobjclient(1)
Portability
The buildobjclient
command is not supported on
client-only CORBA systems.
Parent topic: buildobjclient(1)
Examples
The following example builds a CORBA client application on a Windows system:
set CPPFLAGS=-I%APPDIR%\include
buildobjclient -o empclient.exe -f emp_c.cpp -l userlib1.lib
The following example builds a CORBA client application on a UNIX system using the c shell:
setenv CPPFLAGS=$APPDIR/include
buildobjclient -o empclient -f emp_c.cpp -l userlib1.a
Parent topic: buildobjclient(1)
buildobjserver(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
buildobjserver [-v] [-o name][-ffirstfile-syntax]
[-llastfile-syntax] [-rrmname][-t]
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
Description
Use the buildobjserver
command to construct a CORBA
server application. The command combines the files specified with
the -f
and -l
options with the main
routine and the standard CORBA libraries to form a server
application. The server application is built using the default C++
compiler provided for the platform.
All specified .c
and .cpp
files are
compiled in one invocation of the compilation system for the
operating system in use. Users may specify the compiler to be
invoked by setting the CC
environment variable to the
name of the compiler. If the CC
environment variable
is not defined when buildobjserver
is invoked, the
default C++ language compile command for the operating system in
use is invoked to compile all .c
and .cpp
files.
Users may specify options to be passed to the compiler by
setting the CFLAGS
or the CPPFLAGS
environment variable. If CFLAGS
is not defined but
CPPFLAGS
is defined when buildobjserver
is invoked, the command uses the value of
CPPFLAGS.
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
Options
-
-v
- Specifies that the
buildobjserver
command must work in verbose mode, and it writes the compile command to standard output. -
-o name
- Specifies the name of the server application generated by this
command. If a name is not supplied, the application file is named
server.
type
, wheretype
is an extension that indicates which operating system is being used for the application. For example, an application that is called server on a UNIX system is calledserver.EXE
on a Windows NT system. -
-f firstfile-syntax
- Specifies the file to be included first (that is, before the CORBA libraries) in the compile and link phases of the
buildobjserver
command. For a description of the three ways to specify files, see the table entitled Table 1-2. -
-l lastfile-syntax
- Specifies the file to be included last (that is, after the CORBA libraries) in the compile and link phases of the
buildobjserver
command. For a description of the three ways to specify files, see the table entitled Table 1-3. -
-r rmname
- Specifies the resource manager associated with this server. The
value
rmname
must appear in the resource manager table located in$TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
on UNIX systems or%TUXDIR%\udataobj\RM
on Windows NT systems. -
-h or -?
- Invokes help: information that is useful when running
the
buildobjserver
command. No other action results. -
-t
- Invokes multithreading in the CORBA server application being
built. When you specify this option, you must also set the
MAXDISPATCHTHREADS
parameter in theUBBCONFIG
file to a value greater than 1. If you do not, your CORBA server runs as a single-threaded application.
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
Environment Variables
-
TUXDIR
- Finds the CORBA libraries and include files to use when compiling the server application.
-
CC
- Indicates the compiler to use to compile all files with
.c
or.cpp
file extensions that are passed in through the–l
or-f
option. -
CFLAGS
- Specifies any arguments that are passed as part of the compiler
command line for any files with
.c
or.cpp
file extensions. IfCFLAGS
is not available in thebuildobjserver
command environment, thebuildobjserver
command checks for theCPPFLAGS
environment variable. -
CPPFLAGS
-
Note:
Arguments passed by theCFLAGS
environment variable take priority over theCPPFLAGS
environment variable. -
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
(UNIX systems) - List of directories that contain shared objects to be used by
the compiler, in addition to CORBA shared objects. A colon (:) is
used to separate names of directories. Some UNIX systems require
different environment variables: for HP-UX systems, use the
SHLIB_PATH
environment variable; for AIX, useLIBPATH
. -
LIB
(Windows NT systems) - List of directories in which libraries reside. A semicolon (;) is used to separate names of directories.
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
Portability
The buildobjserver
command is not supported on
client-only CORBA systems.
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
Examples
The following example builds a CORBA server application on a UNIX system using the emp_s.cpp
and emp_i.cpp files
:
buildobjserver -r TUXEDO/SQL -o unobserved
-f “emp_s.cpp emp_i.cpp”
The following example shows how to use the CC
and CFLAGS
environment variables with the buildobjserver
command. The example also shows how to link in the math library, using the -f
and -lm
options, in a Bourne or Korn shell (on a UNIX system):
CFLAGS=-g CC=/bin/cc \
buildobjserver -r TUXEDO/SQL -o TLR -f TLR.o -f util.o -l -lm
The following example shows how to use the buildobjserver
command on a UNIX system with no resource manager specified:
buildobjserver -o PRINTER -f PRINTER.o
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
Sample RM Files
The following sections show sample RM files for all supported operating system platforms:
- Windows NT
-
Oracle_XA;xaosw;C:\Orant\rdbms73\xa\xa73.lib C:\Orant\pro22\lib\msvc\sqllib18.lib
- UNIX
-
Oracle_XA:xaosw:-L$ORACLE_HOME/rdbms/lib -L$ORACLE_HOME/precomp/lib -lc -L/home4/m01/app/oracle/product/7.3.2/lib -lsql -lclntsh -lsqlnet -lncr -lcommon -lgeneric -lepc -lnlsrtl3 -lc3v6 -lcore3 -lsocket -lnsl -lm -ldl -lthread
- Digital UNIX
-
Oracle_XA:xaosw:-L${ORACLE_HOME}/lib -lxa ${ORACLE_HOME}/lib/libsql.a -lsqlnet -lncr -lsqlnet ${ORACLE_HOME}/lib/libclient.a -lcommon -lgeneric -lsqlnet -lncr -lsqlnet ${ORACLE_HOME}/lib/libclient.a -lcommon -lgeneric -lepc -lepcpt -lnlsrtl3 -lc3v6 -lcore3 -lnlsrtl3 -lcore3 -lnlsrtl3 -lm
- AIX
-
Oracle_XA:xaosw:-L${ORACLE_HOME}/lib -lxa -lsql -lsqlnet -lncr -lclient -lcommon -lgeneric -lepc -lnlsrtl3 -lc3v6 -lcore3 -lm -lld
- HP-UX with Oracle 8.04
-
Oracle_XA:xaosw:-L${ORACLE_HOME}/lib -lclntsh
Parent topic: buildobjserver(1)
buildserver(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
buildserver [-C] [-M] [-s services[:func[()]]][-v] [-o outfile] [-f firstfiles] [-l lastfiles] [{-r|-g} rmname] [-E envlabel][-t]
[-z]
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
Description
buildserver
is used to construct an Oracle Tuxedo
ATMI server load module. The command combines the files supplied by
the -f
and -l
options with the standard
server main routine and the standard Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries
to form a load module. The load module is built by the
cc
(1) command, which buildserver
invokes.
(See cc
(1) in any UNIX system reference manual.) The
options to buildserver
have the following meaning:
-
-v
- Specifies that
buildserver
must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes the compilation command to its standard output. -
-o outfile
- Specifies the name of the file the output load module is to
have. If not supplied, the load module is named
SERVER
. -
-f firstfiles
- Specifies one or more user files to be included in the
compilation and link edit phases of
buildserver
first, before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. This option may be specified multiple times. TheCFLAGS
andALTCFLAGS
environment variables, described below, must be used to include any compiler options and their arguments. -
-l lastfiles
- Specifies one or more user files to be included in the
compilation and link edit phases of
buildserver
last, after the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. This option may be specified multiple times. -
-M
- Specifies multiple resource managers associated with this server. If you want your server to be associated with multiple XA complaint resource managers, this option is mandatory. If this option is not specified and you try to boot a server with a configuration file in which this server is specified in a non-multiple resource manager server group, a warning message is printed in the user log and the sever reverts to a general server associating with one resource manager if the "-r" option is specified when executing buildserver command.
-
-r rmname
- Specifies the resource manager associated with this server. The
value
rmname
must appear in the resource manager table located in$TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
. Each line in this file is of the form: -
-s { @filename | service[,service...][:func] | :func } ]
- Specifies the names of services that can be advertised when the server is booted. Service names (and implicit function names) must be less than or equal to 127 characters in length. An explicit function name (that is, a name specified after a colon) can be up to 128 characters in length. Names longer than these limits are truncated with a warning message. When retrieved by tmadmin(1) in Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands or TM_MIB(5), only the first 127 characters of a name are displayed. (See servopts(5).) All functions that can be associated with a service must be specified with this option. In the most common case, a service is performed by a function that carries the same name; that is, the
x
service is performed by functionx
. For example, the following specification builds the associated server with servicesx
,y
, andz
, each to be processed by a function of the same name: -
-c
- Specifies COBOL compilation.
-
-k
- Keeps the server main stub.
buildserver
generates a main stub with data structures such as the service table and amain()
function. This is normally compiled and then removed when the server is built. This option indicates that the source file must be kept (to see what the source filename is, use the-v
option). -
-t
- Specifies multithreading. If you want your servers to be
multithreaded, this option is mandatory. If this option is not
specified and you try to boot a server with a configuration file in
which the value of
MAXDISPATCHTRHREADS
is greater than 1, a warning message is printed in the user log and the server reverts to single-threaded operation. -
-z
- Specifies the
__stdcall
calling convention for the XA switch interfaces.
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
Environment Variables
-
TUXDIR
-
buildserver
uses the environment variableTUXDIR
to find the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries and include files to use during compilation of the server process. -
CC
-
buildserver
normally uses the default C language compilation command to produce the server executable. The default C language compilation command is defined for each supported operating system platform and is defined ascc
(1) for the UNIX system. In order to allow for the specification of an alternate compiler,buildserver
checks for the existence of an environment variable namedCC
. IfCC
does not exist in thebuildserver
environment, or if it is the string""
,buildserver
will use the default C language compiler. IfCC
does exist in the environment, its value is taken to be the name of the compiler to be used. -
CFLAGS
- The environment variable
CFLAGS
is taken to contain a set of arguments to be passed as part of the compiler command line. This is in addition to the command line option "-I${TUXDIR}/include
" passed automatically bybuildserver
. IfCFLAGS
does not exist inbuildserver
’s environment, or if it is the string""
, no compiler command line arguments are added bybuildserver
. -
ALTCC
- When the
-C
option is specified for COBOL compilation,buildserver
normally uses the Oracle Tuxedo shellcobcc(1)
in Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands which in turn callscob
to produce the server executable. In order to allow for the specification of an alternate compiler,buildserver
checks for the existence of an environment variable namedALTCC
. IfALTCC
does not exist inbuildserver
’s environment, or if it is the string""
,buildserver
will usecobcc
. IfALTCC
does exist in the environment, its value is taken to be the name of the compiler command to be executed. -
ALTCFLAGS
- The environment variable
ALTCFLAGS
is taken to contain a set of additional arguments to be passed as part of the COBOL compiler command line when the-C
option is specified. This is in addition to the command line option "-I${TUXDIR}/include
" passed automatically bybuildserver
. When the-C
option is used, putting compiler options and their arguments in thebuildserver -f
option will generate errors; they must be put inALTCFLAGS
. If not set, the value is set to the same value used forCFLAGS
, as specified above. -
COBOPT
- The environment variable
COBOPT
is taken to contain a set of additional arguments to be used by the COBOL compiler, when the-C
option is specified. -
COBCPY
- The environment variable
COBCPY
indicates which directories contain a set of COBOL copy files to be used by the COBOL compiler, when the-C
option is specified. -
TM_COB_STATIC
- The environment variable
TM_COB_STATIC
indicates whether shared version or static versionlibcobatmi
library to be linked bybuildserver
. The environment variable value may be “Yes
” or “No
”. If “Yes
” is set, static versionlibcobatmi
library is used; otherwise shared version is used. If the environment variable is not specified, the shared versionlibcobatmi
library is used by default. -
COB
- The environment variable
COB
indicates which COBOL compiler is used. It supports two parameters:AcuCobol
andIBMCobol
. -
TM_COB_VERSION
- The environment variable
TM_COB_VERSION
indicates the ACUCOBOL compiler version. This environment variable takes effect only when-C
option is specified and the environment variableCOB
is set to “AcuCobol
”. The value format of the environment variable is “[0-9]+\.[0-9]
”.- If
TM_COB_VERSION
value is less than7.0
,buildserver
generates old style ACUCOBOL stub code; otherwisebuildserver
generates new style ACUCOBOL stub code. - If
TM_COB_VERSION
is not set,buildserver
generates new style ACUCOBOL stub code by default.
- If
-
TM_COB_CC_FILES
- When ACUCOBOL compiler is used, only COBOL source files can be
specified with
-f
option. If there are other user files to be passed tocc(1)
in the compilation and link edit phases ofbuildserver
first, before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries, these files must be specified with the environment variableTM_COB_CC_FILES
. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. The environment variable takes effect only when-C
option is specified and the environment variableCOB
is set to “AcuCobol
”. -
ACUCOBOL
- When ACUCOBOL is used for COBOL compilation, the environment
variable
ACUCOBOL
indicates the ACUCOBOL installed directory so that ACUCOBOL system libraries and files can be found during the server process compilation. -
IBMCOBOL
- When IBMCOBOL is used for COBOL compilation, the environment variable IBMCOBOL indicates the IBMCOBOL installed directory so that IBMCOBOL system libraries and files can be found during the server compilation.
-
TM_COBOLIT_VERSION
-
TM_COBOLIT_VERSION
is taken to judge the COBOL compiler version. Set this environment variable when using COBOL-IT compiler 3.5 or higher; otherwise, the build will fail. Once you set it, Tuxedo will automatically specifyCOBITOPT=-fno-main
to compile COBOL main function. -
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
(UNIX systems) - The environment variable
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
indicates which directories contain shared objects to be used by the COBOL compiler, in addition to the Oracle Tuxedo shared objects. Some UNIX systems require different environment variables: for HP-UX systems, use theSHLIB_PATH
environment variable; for AIX, useLIBPATH
. -
LIB
(Windows NT systems) - Indicates a list of directories within which to find libraries. A semicolon (;) is used to separate the list of directories.
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
Compatibility
In earlier releases, the -g
option was allowed to
specify a
genoption
of sql
or
database
. For upward compatibility, this option is a
synonym for the -r
option.
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
Portability
The buildserver
compilation tool is supported on
any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is
supported. RM XA libraries are not supported on the Windows
platform.
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
Notices
Some compilation systems may require some code to be executed
within the main()
. For example, this could be used to
initialize constructors in C++ or initialize the library for COBOL.
A general mechanism is available for including application code in
the server main()
immediately after any variable
declarations and before any executable statements. This will allow
for the application to declare variables and execute statements in
one block of code. The application exit is defined as follows:
#ifdef TMMAINEXIT #include "mainexit.h" #endif
. To use
this feature, the application must include
"-DTMMAINEXIT"
in the ALTCFLAGS
(for
COBOL) or CFLAGS
(for C) environment variables and
provide a mainexit.h
in the current directory (or use
the -I
include option to include it from another
directory).
For example, Micro Focus Cobol V3.2.x with a PRN number with the
last digits greater than 11.03 requires that cobinit
()
be called in main
before any COBOL routines, if using
shared libraries. This can be accomplished by creating a
mainexit.h
file with a call to cobinit()
(possibly preceded by a function prototype) and following the
procedure above.
For the server compiled using ACUCOBOL compiler,
servopts(5)
has special meaning. The
uargs
(value specified after '--
')
of the server CLOPT
parameter are passed as arguments
to acu_initv()
subroutine to start ACUCOBOL CVM.
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
Examples
The following example shows how to specify the resource manager (-r TUXEDO/SQL
) libraries on the buildserver
command line:
buildserver -r TUXEDO/SQL -s OPEN_ACCT -s CLOSE_ACCT -o ACCT
-f ACCT.o -f appinit.o -f util.o
The following example shows how buildserver
can be supplied CC
and CFLAGS
variables and how -f
can be used to supply a -lm
option to the CC
line to link in the math library:
CFLAGS=-g CC=/bin/cc buildserver -r TUXEDO/SQL -s DEPOSIT
-s WITHDRAWAL -s INQUIRY -o TLR -f TLR.o -f util.o -f -lm
The following example shows use of the buildserver
command with no resource manager specified: buildserver -s PRINTER -o PRINTER -f PRINTER.o
Listing 4 shows a general COBOL compiler example.
Listing 4 BUILDSERVER COBOL Example
COBCPY=$TUXDIR/cobinclude
COBOPT="-C ANS85 -C ALIGN=8 -C NOIBMCOMP -C TRUNC=ANSI -C OSEXT=cbl"
COBDIR=/usr/lib/cobol
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$COBDIR/coblib
export COBOPT COBCPY COBDIR LD_LIBRARY_PATH
buildserver -C -r TUXEDO/SQL -s OPEN_ACCT -s CLOSE_ACCT -o ACCT -f ACCT.o -f appinit.o -f util.o
Listing 5 shows an ACUCOBOL compiler example.
Listing 5 BUILDSERVER ACUCOBOL Example
TM_COB_STATIC=no
COB=AcuCobol
COBCPY=$TUXDIR/cobinclude
COBOPT="-Ca -v -w -Ga -Dw64 -Dl8 -Da8"
TM_COB_VERSION=7.2
ACUCOBOL=/opt/AcuCobol-7.2.1
TM_COB_CC_FILES="-lruncbl -lclnt -lacvt -lfsi -laregex -lacuterm -lextfh -laxml -lexpat -lvision -lesql -lacme -lz -lm"
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$ACUCOBOL/lib:$TUXDIR/lib
export TUXDIR TM_COB_STATIC COB COBCPY COBOPT TM_COB_VERSION
ACUCOBOL TM_COB_CC_FILES LD_LIBRARY_PATH
buildserver -C -sTOUPPER -sTOLOWER -o CSIMPSRV -f CTOUPPER.cbl -f CLOWER.cbl -f TPSVRINIT.cbl
Listing 6 shows an IBMCOBOL compiler example.
Listing 6 BUILDSERVER IBMCOBOL Example
TUXDIR=/opt/tuxedo10.0
TM_COB_STATIC=no
COB=IBMCobol
IBMCOBOL=/usr/lpp/cobol
COBCPY=$TUXDIR/cobinclude
COBOPT="-Ca -v -w -Ga -Dw64 -Dl8 -Da8"
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$IBMCOBOL/lib:$TUXDIR/lib
export TUXDIR TM_COB_STATIC COB COBCPY COBOPT IBMCOBOL LD_LIBRARY_PATH
buildserver -C -sTOUPPER -sTOLOWER -o CSIMPSRV -f CTOUPPER.cbl -f CLOWER.cbl -f TPSVRINIT.cbl
See Also:
- buildtms(1)
UBBCONFIG(5)
,servopts(5)
in the Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference
C compiler and linker documentation in the reference manual for your operating system.
Parent topic: buildserver(1)
buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
buildTM_MQI(1)
—Links the TM_MQI
server
buildTM_MQO(1)
—Links the TM_MQO
server
buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
—Links the TMQUEUE_MQM
server
Parent topic: buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
Synopsis
buildTM_MQI [-v] [-r rmname] [-c] [-t] [-o outfile]
buildTM_MQO [-v] [-r rmname] [-c] [-t] [-o outfile]
buildTMQUEUE_MQM [-v] [-r rmname] [-c] [-t] [-o outfile]
Parent topic: buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
Description
These commands build one of three TM_MQI
,
TM_MQO
, or TMQUEUE_MQM
servers. The
default output location is $TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQI
,
$TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQO
, or
$TUXDIR/bin/TMQUEUE_MQM
. This may be changed using the
-o
option.
The servers built by these commands are used by the Tuxedo MQ Adapter to interact with IBM WebSphere MQ as described in the Oracle MQ Adapter for Tuxedo 10.0 User Guide.
The user must have permissions to create or overwrite the server output file.
These commands invoke buildserver to build the appropriate MQ Adapter server.
Building the MQ Adapter server files using these commands instead of distributing prelinked objects allows the Tuxedo administrator to configure:
- Whether the MQ adapter servers are to be linked with WebSphere MQ Server libraries or with WedSphere MQ client libraries.
- Whether the MQ adapter servers are to be linked with the
dynamic XA switch
MQRMIXASwitchDynamic
or the static RM switchMQRMIXASwitch
. - The patch level and release of WebSphere MQ libraries to link with.
In addition to building the MQ Adapter servers, the system administrator will need to execute buildtms at some time in order to build the WebSphere MQ TMS server.
Parent topic: buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
Options
-
-v
- Specifies that the command must work in verbose mode. In particular, the command writes the buildserver command to its standard output and specifies the -v option to buildserver.
-
-r rm_name
- Specifies the resource manager name associated with the MQ
Adapter servers. The value
rm_name
must appear in the resource manager table located at$TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
. The entry associated with therm_name
value is used to include the correct libraries for the resource manager automatically and properly to set up the interface between the transaction manager and resource manager (using thexa_switch_t structure
). The default value for this parameter isMQSeries_XA_RMI
. -
-c
- Specifies building MQ Adapter with WebSphere MQ client library.
-
-t
- Specifies building multi-threaded servers. This option takes effect only on TM_MQI server.
-
-o outfile
- Specifies the name of the file the output load module is to
have. If not specified, the default is
$TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQI
,$TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQO
, or$TUXDIR/bin/TMQUEUE_MQM
.
Parent topic: buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
Examples
buildTM_MQI -v -o $TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQI
buildTM_MQO -v -o $TUXDIR/bin/TM_MQO
buildTMQUEUE_MQM -v -o $TUXDIR/bin/TMQUEUE_MQM
See Also:
Parent topic: buildTM_MQI(1), buildTM_MQO(1), buildTMQUEUE_MQM(1)
buildtms(1)
Description
buildtms
is used to construct a transaction manager server load module.
While several TM servers are provided with the Oracle Tuxedo system, new resource managers may be provided to work with the Oracle Tuxedo system for distributed transaction processing. The resource manager must conform to the X/OPEN XA interface. The following four items must be published by the resource manager vendor: the name of the structure of type xa_switch_t
that contains the name of the resource manager, flags indicating capabilities of the resource manager, and function pointers for the actual XA functions; the name of the resource manager that is contained in the name element of the xa_switch_t
structure; the name of the object files that provide the services of the XA interface and supporting software; and the format of the information string supplied to the OPENINFO
and CLOSEINFO
parameters in the UBBCONFIG
configuration file. See UBBCONFIG(5).
When integrating a new resource manager into the Oracle Tuxedo system, the file $TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
must be updated to include the information about the resource manager. The format of this file is
rm_name :rm_structure_name:library_names
where rm_name
is the resource manager name, rm_structure_name
is the name of the xa_switch_t
structure, and library_names
is the list of object files for the resource manager. White space (tabs and/or spaces) is allowed before and after each of the values and may be embedded within the library_names
. The colon (:
) character may not be embedded within any of the values. Lines beginning with a pound sign (#
) are treated as comments and are ignored.
Note:
Colon (:) is the list separator for UNIX systems. Use a semi-colon (;) in place of the colon for Windows systems.A transaction manager server for the new resource manager must be built using buildtms
and installed in $TUXDIR/bin
. buildtms
uses the buildserver(1) command to build the resulting a.out
. The options to buildtms
have the following meaning:
-
-v
- Specifies that
buildtms
must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes thebuildserver
command to its standard output and specifies the-v
option tobuildserver
. -
-o
name - Specifies the name of the file the output load module is to have.
-
-r
rm_name - Specifies the resource manager associated with this server. The value
rm_name
must appear in the resource manager table located in$TUXDIR/udataobj/RM
. The entry associated with therm_name
value is used to include the correct libraries for the resource manager automatically and properly to set up the interface between the transaction manager and resource manager (using thexa_switch_t
structure). -
-z
- Specifies the
__stdcall
calling convention for the XA switch interfaces.
buildtms
uses the buildserver
command to produce the a.out
. buildserver
uses the CC
and CFLAGS
environment variables, if set, for the compiler and compiler flags, respectively.
Parent topic: buildtms(1)
Portability
buildtms
is supported as an Oracle Tuxedo
system-supplied compilation tool on any platform on which the
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI or CORBA server environment is supported. RM XA
libraries are not supported on the Windows platform.
Parent topic: buildtms(1)
Examples
buildtms -o $TUXDIR/bin/TMS_XYZ -r XYZ/SQL # TMS for XYZ resource manager
See Also:
Parent topic: buildtms(1)
buildwsh(1)
Description
buildwsh
is used to construct a customized Oracle
Tuxedo ATMI workstation handler module. The files included by the
caller must include only the application buffer type switch and any
required supporting routines. The command combines the files
supplied by the -f
option with the standard Oracle
Tuxedo ATMI libraries necessary to form a workstation handler load
module. The load module is built by the cc
(1) command
described in UNIX system reference manuals, which
buildwsh
invokes. The options to buildwsh
have the following meaning:
-
-v
- Specifies that
buildwsh
must work in verbose mode. In particular, it writes thecc
command to its standard output. -
-o
name - Specifies the filename of the output workstation handler load module. The name specified here must also be specified with the
-w
WSHname
option of the WSL(5) server in theSERVER
section of the configuration file. If not supplied, the load module is namedWSH
. -
-f firstfiles
- Specifies one or more user files to be included in the
compilation and/or link edit phases of
buildwsh
. Source files are compiled using the either thecc
command or the compilation command specified through theCC
environment variable. Object files resulting from compilation of source files and object files specified directly as arguments to the-f
option are included after all object files necessary to build a base workstation handler process and before the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI libraries. If more than one file is specified, filenames must be separated by white space and the entire list must be enclosed in quotation marks. This option can be specified multiple times.
buildwsh
normally uses the cc
command
to produce the a.out
. In order to allow for the
specification of an alternate compiler, buildwsh
checks for the existence of a shell variable named CC
.
If CC
does not exist in buildwsh
’s
environment, or if it is the string "", buildwsh
will
use cc
as the compiler. If CC
does exist
in the environment, its value is taken to be the name of the
compiler to be executed. Likewise, the shell variable
CFLAGS
is taken to contain a set of parameters to be
passed to the compiler.
If your application uses shared libraries, it is not necessary to go through this compile and link process. See “Managing Typed Buffers” in Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using C.
Parent topic: buildwsh(1)
Portability
The buildwsh
compilation tool is supported on any
platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is
supported.
Parent topic: buildwsh(1)
Examples
CC=ncc CFLAGS=”-I $TUXDIR/include”; export CC CFLAGS buildwsh
-o APPWSH -f apptypsw.o
See Also:
- buildclient(1)
- WSL(5)
cc
(1),ld
(1) in a UNIX system reference manual
Parent topic: buildwsh(1)
cobcc(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
cobcc
is used as an interface shell to the COBOL compiler. It is invoked, by default, when buildclient(1)
or buildserver(1)
is executed with the -C
(COBOL) option. This can be overridden by specifying the ALTCC
environment variable.
The following list indicates the options recognized by
cobcc
. To use these options, set the environment
variable ALTCFLAGS
to the string of options to be
recognized by cobcc
when running
buildclient
or buildserver
. Consult your
documentation for the COBOL and C compilers to see what effect the
various options have.
Note:
On a Windows system, theALTCC
and ALTCFLAGS
environment variables are not applicable and setting them will produce unexpected results. You must compile your application first using a COBOL compiler and then pass the resulting object file to the buildclient(1)
or buildserver(1)
command.
For cobcc
, unlike cc
and cob
, all options must come before any filenames.
-
-c
- This option specifies that the link phase must be suppressed. That is, compilation will be done but an executable program will not be generated.
-
-p -g -r -O
- These options are passed directly to the COBOL compiler.
-
-l argument
- This option and its argument are passed directly to the COBOL compiler (with no white space separating them).
-
-L argument
- This option and its argument are passed directly to the COBOL compiler (with one space separating them).
-
-o output_file
- This option is used to specify the name of the executable file that is output from the link stage.
-
-E -P -S
- These options are passed through the COBOL compiler to the C compiler, and also cause suppression of the link phase.
-
-A -C -H -f -G
- These options are passed through the COBOL compiler to the C compiler.
-
-w
- This option causes warnings to be suppressed from both the COBOL and C compilers.
-
-D argument
- This option and its argument are passed through the COBOL compiler to the C compiler. It is used to define macros in C.
-
{-T -Y -U -I -B -X -F -q} argument
- Each of these options takes an argument. The option and its argument are passed through the COBOL compiler to the C compiler.
-
-V -v
- Each of these options is passed both to the COBOL compiler and the C compiler.
-
-a -s
- Each of these options is passed to the loader.
-
-u argument
- This option and its argument are passed to the loader.
-
-W argument
- The argument may consist of up to three comma-separated
fields. If the first part of the argument is -
p
or -0
, it is passed to the C compiler. If it starts with -a
, it is passed to the assembler. If it starts with -l
, it is passed to the loader. If it starts with -C
, it is passed to the COBOL compiler. Otherwise, it is passed through to the C compiler.
The options and their arguments and the filenames are passed to
the COBOL compiler with the correct options so that the right
information is processed by the COBOL compiler, the C compiler, or
the loader. The COBOL compiler name is assumed to be
cob
and already in the PATH
.
See Also:
- buildclient(1)
- buildserver(1)
-
cc
(1) in a UNIX system reference manual - Micro Focus COBOL/2 Operating Guide, Micro Focus Ltd.
Parent topic: cobcc(1)
cpy2record
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
cpy2record
—Generates Oracle Tuxedo RECORD
description file from copybook file.
Parent topic: cpy2record
Description
This utility parses the COBOL copybook file and generates the corresponding Oracle Tuxedo RECORD description files. This tool is only used to parse COBOL copybook programs and will not parse files containing COBOL source statements.
cpy2record
supports the following options:
-
-b
- Specifies the base number for FML32 table. The default is
10000
. -
-i
- With
-i
option, if#vname
is not specified in copybook file,rname
is not converted to lowcase as the defaultvname
; without-i
option,rname
is converted to lowercase. -
-R
- Indicates this tool creates copybook description file.
-
-t
- Specifies the generated FML32 table file; the followed parameter is the output FML32 table file name.
-
-o
- Specifies the output file name, followed parameter is the
output file name. If this parameter is not specified, the output
file name changes the suffix of the input file name to
.R
. For example,abc.cbl
is converted toabc.R
.
Parent topic: cpy2record
Environment Variables
PATH
Before using cpy2record
, add TUXDIR/bin
and Java command java
to system environment PATH
.
Parent topic: cpy2record
Examples
- The following example converts copybook file
abc.cbl
to RECORD fileabc.R
:-
cpy2record /home/abc.cbl
Or
-
cpy2record -R /home/abc.cbl
-
- The following example converts copybook file
abc.cbl
and outputs to view filexyz.R
:-
cpy2record -o xyz.R /home/abc.cbl
-
- The following example is a COBOL copybook file example.
* customer.cpy 01 CUSTOMER. 05 name PIC X(10). 05 balance PIC S9(9) COMP-5. 05 address PIC X(80).
See Also:
- Programming An Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using FML
- Using a RECORD Typed Buffer in Programming An Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using C
Parent topic: cpy2record
dmadmin(1)
- Name
- Synopsis
- Description
- Options
- Administration Mode Commands
- Configuration Mode Commands
- Configuration Input Format
- Configuration Limitations
- Domains Terminology Improvements
- Restrictions for Configuration Field Identifiers/ Updates
- Configuring the DM_LOCAL Section
- Configuring the DM_REMOTE Section
- Configuring the DM_TDOMAIN Section
- Configuring the DM_OSITP Section
- Configuring the DM_OSITPX Section
- Configuring the DM_EXPORT Section
- Configuring the DM_IMPORT Section
- Configuring the DM_EVT_IN Section
- Configuring the DM_EVT_OUT Section
- Configuring the DM_ROUTING Section
- Configuring the DM_ACCESS_ CONTROL Section
- Configuring the DM_PASSWORDS Section
- Diagnostics in Configuration Mode
- Configuration Example
- Security
- Environment Variables
- General Diagnostics
- Interoperability
- Portability
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
dmadmin
is an interactive command interpreter used for the administration of domain gateway groups defined for a particular Oracle Tuxedo application involved in a Domains configuration. This page describes the use of dmadmin
for TDomain gateways, SNA Gateways (SNAX), and OSI TP gateways of the Oracle Tuxedo Domains component. For a description of the Oracle Tuxedo Domains component, see Using the Oracle Tuxedo Domains Component.
dmadmin
can operate in two modes: administration
mode and configuration mode.
dmadmin
enters administration mode when
called with no parameters. Administration mode is the default mode.
In this mode, dmadmin
can be run on any active node
(excluding workstations) within an active application. Application
administrators can use this mode to obtain or change parameters on
any active domain gateway group. Application administrators may
also use this mode to create, destroy, or re-initialize the Domains
transaction log for a particular local domain access point. In this
case, the domain gateway group associated with that local domain
access point must not be active, and dmadmin
must be
run on the machine assigned to the corresponding gateway group.
dmadmin
requires the use of the Domains
administrative server (DMADM
) for the administration
of the BDMCONFIG
file, and the gateway administrative
server (GWADM
) for the reconfiguration of active
domain gateway groups. There is one DMADM
process
running for each Oracle Tuxedo application involved in a Domains
configuration, and there is one GWADM
process running
for each domain gateway group.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Options
-
-c
-
dmadmin
enters configuration mode when it is invoked with the-c
option or when the config subcommand is invoked. Application administrators can use this mode to update or add new configuration information to the binary version of the Domains configuration file (BDMCONFIG
). -
-2
- Specifies whether to add, update, or delete a second password pair (password pair 2). If not specified, the deault is password pair 1.
-
-s <start-time>
- Specifies when a password pair becomes effective. If not
specified,the password becomes effective immediately. Time must be
specified in UTC string format
(
yyyy/mm/dd/hh:mm:ss
). -
-e <end-time>
- Specifies when a password pair expires. If not specified, the
password pair will not expires until it is deleted or updated
explicitly from the system. Time must be specified in UTC string
format (
yyyy/mm/dd/hh:mm:ss
).
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Administration Mode Commands
Once dmadmin
has been invoked, commands may be entered at the prompt (“>”) according to the following syntax:
command [arguments]
Several commonly occurring arguments can be given defaults via the default
command. Commands that accept parameters set via the default
command check default
to see if a value has been set. If one has not been set, an error message is returned.
Once set, a default remains in effect until the session is ended, unless changed by another default
command. Defaults may be overridden by entering an explicit value on the command line, or unset by entering an *
(asterisk) value. The effect of an override lasts for a single instance of the command.
Output from dmadmin
commands is paginated according to the pagination command in use (see the paginate
subcommand in the discussion that follows).
Note:
For many commands local_domain_access_point_name
is a required argument, but note also that it can be set with the default
command.
The following commands are available in administration
mode:
-
advertise (adv) -d local_domain_access_point_name [{service}]
- Advertises all remote services provided by the named local domain access point or the specified remote service. If the local domain specified by
-d
option works on bypass-domain model,advertise
only advertises those services that are exported by connected non-bypass remote domains. If a service name is given and the service locates in a remote domain which works on bypass-domain model or has not been connected yet,advertise
raises an error. -
advertiseevent (advevt) -d local_domain_name_[{-all | event}]
- Allows all configured events (
-all
) or a specified event (namedevent
) to be sent out to remote domains. These events are configured withLACCESSPOINT=
in “local_domain_name
*DM_EVT_OUT
" section. -
audit (audit) -d local_domain_access_point_name [{off | on}]
- Activates (
on
) or deactivates (off
) the audit trace for the named local domain access point. If no option is set, the current setting is toggled between the valueson
andoff
, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting isoff
. -
chbktime (chbt) -d local_domain_access_point_name-tbktime
- Changes the blocking timeout for a particular local domain access point.
-
config (config)
- Enters configuration mode. Commands issued in this mode follow the conventions defined in Configuration Mode Commands.
-
connect (co) -d local_domain_access_point_name [-R remote_domain_access_point_name]
- Connects the local domain gateway to the remote domain gateway. If the connection attempt fails and you have configured the local domain gateway to retry a connection, repeated attempts to connect (via automatic connection retry processing) are made. (If
-R
is not specified, the command applies to all remote domain access points configured for this local domain gateway.) -
crdmlog (crdlog)[-d local_domain_access_point_name]
- Creates the Domains transaction log for the named local domain access point on the current machine (the machine where
dmadmin
is running). The command uses the parameters specified in theDMCONFIG
file. This command fails if the domain gateway group associated with the named local domain access point is active on the current machine or if the log already exists. -
default (d) [-d local_domain_access_point_name]
- Sets the corresponding argument to be the default local domain access point. Defaults may be unset by specifying
*
(asterisk) as an argument. If the default command is entered with no arguments, the current defaults are printed. -
disconnect (dco) -d local_domain_access_point_name [-R remote_domain_access_point_name]
- Breaks the connection between the local domain gateway and the remote domain gateway and does not initiate connection retry processing. If no connection is active, but automatic connection retry processing is in effect, this command stops the automatic retry processing. (If
-R
is not specified, the command applies to all remote domain access points configured for this local domain gateway.) -
dsdmlog (dsdlg) -d local_domain_access_point_name [ -y]
- Destroys the Domains transaction log for the named local domain access point on the current machine (that is, the machine where
dmadmin
is running). An error is returned if a Domains transaction log is not defined for this local domain access point, if the domain gateway group associated with the local domain access point is active, or if outstanding transaction records exist in the log. The term outstanding transactions means that a global transaction has been committed but an end-of-transaction has not yet been written. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-y
option is specified. -
echo (e) [{off | on}]
- Echoes input command lines when set to
on
. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting is off. -
forgettrans (ft) -d local_domain_access_point_name [ -t tran_id]
- Forgets one or all heuristic log records for the named local domain access point. If the transaction identifier
tran_id
is specified, only the heuristic log record for that transaction is forgotten. The transaction identifiertran_id
can be obtained from theprinttrans
command or from theULOG
file. -
help (h) [command]
- Prints help messages. If
command
is specified, the abbreviation, arguments, and description for that command are printed. Omitting all arguments causes the syntax of all commands to be displayed. -
indmlog (indlg) -d local_domain_access_point_name [ -y]
- Reinitializes the Domains transaction log for the named local domain access point on the current machine (that is, the machine where
dmadmin
is running). An error is returned if aDMTLOG
is not defined for this local domain access point, if the domain gateway group associated with the local domain access point is active, or if outstanding transaction records exist in the log. The term outstanding transactions means that a global transaction has been committed but an end-of-transaction has not yet been written. The command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-y
option is specified. -
paginate (page) [{off | on}]
- Paginates output. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting is on, unless either standard input or standard output is a non-tty device. Pagination may only be turned on when both standard input and standard output are tty devices. The shell environment variable
PAGER
may be used to override the default command used for paging output. The default paging command is the indigenous one to the native operating system environment, for example, the commandpg
is the default on UNIX system operating environments. -
passwd (passwd) [ -r ] local_domain_access_point_name remote_domain_access_point_name [ LDOM RDOM |-2 | –s <start-time> -e <end-time>]
- Prompts the administrator for new passwords for the specified local and remote domain access points. The
-r
option specifies that existing passwords and new passwords must be encrypted using a new key generated by the system. The password is limited to at most 30 characters.passwd
is only supported by TDomain gateways. -
LDOM RDOM
- Adds password pair 1 for the TDOMAIN session
<LDOM, RDOM>
. The password becomes valid immediately, and never expires. If an old password pair 1 exists, this command fails. -
LDOM RDOM -2
- Adds password pair 2 for the TDOMAIN session
<LDOM, RDOM>
. The password becomes valid immediately, and never expires. If an old password pair 1 exists, this command fail. -
LDOM RDOM –s <start-time> -e <end-time>
- Adds password pair 1 (or password pair 2 if
-2
is included) for the TDOMAIN session<LDOM, RDOM>
. The password becomes valid at<start-time>
, and expires at<end-time>
. If an old password pair 1 exists, this command fails. -
printdomain (pd) -d local_domain_access_point_name
- Prints information about the named local domain access point. Information printed includes a list of connected remote domains, a list of remote domains being retried (if any), global information shared by the gateway group processes, and additional information that is dependent on the domain gateway type instantiation.
-
printstats (pstats) -d local_domain_access_point_name
- Prints statistical and performance information gathered by the named local domain access point. The information printed is dependent on the domain gateway type.
-
printtrans (pt) -d local_domain_access_point_name
- Prints transaction information for the named local domain access point. The output for each transaction record contains the following colon-delimited string fields:
-
quit (q)
- Terminates the session.
-
resume (res) -d local_domain_access_point_name [{ -all | service}]
- Resumes processing of either the specified service or all remote services handled by the named local domain access point.
-
stats (stats) -d local_domain_access_point_name [{ off | on | reset }]
- Activates (
on
), deactivates (off
), or resets (reset
) statistics gathering for the named local domain access point. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled between the valueson
andoff
, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting isoff
. -
statsvc (statsvc) -d local_domain_access_point_name -t interval_time_number
- Activates (
on
) or deactivates (off
) the statistics audit trace for the named local domain access point with remote service call. If the interval time number is greater than 0, this feature is activated; the current interval time setting takes effect, and the initial setting is switched off. When you activate (on
) the statistics audit trace, if no event occurs in the interval time,GWADM
does not flush the data to audit file, meaning,GWADM
only flushes the new data that occurs in an interval time to audit log file. -
suspend (susp) -d local_domain_access_point_name [{ -all | service}]
- Suspends one or all remote services for the named local domain access point.
-
topendpasswd (tepasswd) [ -r]
- Prompts the administrator for a new password for the specified
TOP END
domain. The-r
option specifies that the existing passwords and new password must be encrypted using a new key generated by the system. -
unadvertise (unadv) -d local_domain_access_point_name [{service}]
- Unadvertises one or all remote services for the named local domain access point. If the local domain specified by
-d
option works on bypass domain model,unadvertise
only unadvertises those services that are exported by non-bypass remote domain. If a service name is given and the service locates in a remote domain which works on bypass domain model, advertise raises an error. -
unadvertiseevent (unadvevt) -d local_domain_name_[{-all | event}]
- Forbids all configured events (
-all
) or a specified event (namedevent
) to be sent out to remote domains. These events are configured withLACCESSPOINT
=local_domain_name
in “*DM_EVT_OUT
” section. -
verbose (v) [{off | on}]
- Produces output in verbose mode. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting is
off
. -
! shellcommand
- Escapes to shell and executes
shellcommand
. -
!!
- Repeats previous shell command.
-
# [text]
- Lines beginning with "#" are comment lines and are ignored.
-
<CR>
- Repeats the last command.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuration Mode Commands
The dmadmin
command enters configuration mode when executed with the -c
option or when the config
subcommand is used. In this mode, dmadmin
allows run-time updates to the BDMCONFIG
file. dmadmin
manages a buffer that contains input field values to be added or retrieved, and displays output field values and status after each operation completes. The user can update the input buffer using any available text editor.
dmadmin
first prompts for the desired section followed by a prompt for the desired operation.
The prompt for the section of the BDMCONFIG
file is as follows:
Section:
1) RESOURCES 2) LOCAL_DOMAINS
3) REMOTE_DOMAINS 4) LOCAL_SERVICES
5) REMOTE_SERVICES 6) ROUTING
7) ACCESS_CONTROL 8) PASSWORDS
9) TDOMAINS 10) OSITPS
11) SNADOMS 12) LOCAL_REMOTE_USER
13) REMOTE_USERS 14) SNACRMS
15) SNASTACKS 16) SNALINKS
19) OSITPX
20) EVENTS_IN 21) EVENTS_OUT
q) QUIT
Enter Section [1]:
The number of the default section appears in square brackets at the end of the prompt. You can accept the default by pressing RETURN
or ENTER
. To select another section enter its number, then press RETURN
or ENTER
.
dmadmin
then prompts for the desired operation.
Operations:
1) FIRST 2) NEXT
3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD
5) UPDATE 6) DELETE
7) NEW_SECTION 8) QUIT
Enter Operation [1]:
The number of the default operation is printed in square brackets at the end of the prompt. Pressing RETURN
or ENTER
selects this option. To select another operation enter its number, then press RETURN
or ENTER
.
The currently supported operations are:
-
FIRST
—retrieves the first record from the specified section. No key fields are needed (they are ignored if in the input buffer). -
NEXT
—retrieves the next record from the specified section, based on the key fields in the input buffer. -
RETRIEVE
—retrieves the indicated record from the specified section by key field(s) (see fields description below). -
ADD
—adds the indicated record in the specified section. Any fields not specified (unless required) take their defaults as specified in DMCONFIG(5). The current value for all fields is returned in the output buffer. This operation can only be done by the Oracle Tuxedo administrator. -
UPDATE
—updates the record specified in the input buffer in the selected section. Any fields not specified in the input buffer remain unchanged. The current value for all fields is returned in the input buffer. This operation can only be done by the Oracle Tuxedo administrator. -
DELETE
—deletes the record specified in the input buffer from the selected section. This operation can only be done by the Oracle Tuxedo system administrator. -
NEW SECTION
—clears the input buffer (all fields are deleted). After this operation,dmadmin
immediately prompts for the section again. -
QUIT
—exits the program gracefully (dmadmin
is terminated). A value ofq
for any prompt also exits the program.
For configuration operations, the effective user identifier must match the Oracle Tuxedo administrator user identifier (UID
) for the machine on which this program is executed. When a record is updated or added, all defaults and validations used by dmloadcf(1) are enforced.
dmadmin
then prompts you to indicate whether you want to edit the input buffer:
Enter editor to add/modify fields [n]?
Entering a value of y
puts the input buffer into a temporary file and executes the text editor. The environment variable EDITOR
is used to determine which editor is to be used; the default is ed
, a UNIX text editor. The input format is a set of field name/field value pairs and is described in the Configuration Input Format. The field names associated with each DMCONFIG
section are listed in tables in the subsections that follow. The semantics of the fields and associated ranges, defaults, restrictions, and so on are described in DMCONFIG(5)
, and DM_MIB(5). In many cases, the field name is the same as the KEYWORD
in the DMCONFIG
file, prefixed with "TA_
". When the user completes editing the input buffer, dmadmin
reads it. If more than one line is included for a particular field name, the first line is used and other lines are ignored. If any errors occur, a syntax error is printed and dmadmin
prompts you to indicate whether you want to edit the file to correct the problem:
Enter editor to correct?
If the problem is not corrected (response n
), the input buffer will contain no fields. Otherwise, the editor is executed again.
Finally, dmadmin
asks whether the operation must be executed:
Perform operation [y]?
When the operation completes, dmadmin
prints the return value as in Return value TAOK
followed by the output buffer fields. The process then begins again with a prompt for the section. All output buffer fields are available in the input buffer unless the buffer is cleared.
Entering break at any time restarts the interaction at the prompt for the section.
When "QUIT"
is selected, dmadmin
prompts for authorization to create a backup text version of the configuration file:
Unload BDMCONFIG file into ASCII backup [y]?
If a backup is selected, dmadmin
prompts for a filename:
Backup filename [DMCONFIG]
On success, dmadmin
indicates that a backup was created; otherwise, an error is printed.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuration Input Format
Input packets consist of lines formatted as follows:
fldname fldval
The field name is separated from the field value by one or more tabs (or spaces).
Lengthy field values can be continued on the next line by having the continuation line begin with one or more tabs (which are dropped when read back into dmadmin
).
Empty lines consisting of a single newline character are ignored.
To enter an unprintable character in the field value or to start a field value with a tab, use a backslash followed by the two-character hexadecimal representation of the desired character (see ASCII
(5) in a UNIX reference manual). A space, for example, can be entered in the input data as \20. A backslash can be entered using two backslash characters. dmadmin
recognizes all input in this format, but its greatest usefulness is for non-printing characters.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuration Limitations
The following are general limitations of the dynamic Domains reconfiguration capability:
- Values for key fields (as indicated in the following sections) may not be modified. Key fields can be modified, when the system is down, by reloading the configuration file.
- Dynamic deletions cannot be applied when the domain gateway group associated with a local domain access point is active (running).
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Domains Terminology Improvements
For Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1 or later, the Domains MIB uses
improved class and attribute terminology to describe the
interaction between local and remote domains. The improved
terminology has been applied to the DM_MIB
reference
page, classes, and error messages, and to the DMCONFIG
reference page, section names, parameter names, and error messages.
Although the improved terminology has not been applied to the
dmadmin
user interface, dmadmin
understands both the previous and the improved
DMCONFIG
terminology.
For backwards compatibility, aliases are provided between the DMCONFIG
terminology used prior to Oracle Tuxedo 7.1 and the improved Domains MIB terminology. In Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1 or later, dmadmin
accepts both versions of the DMCONFIG
terminology. For details, see Domains Terminology Improvements” in the DM_MIB(5) reference page.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Restrictions for Configuration Field Identifiers/ Updates
The following sections describe, for each DMCONFIG
section, the field identifiers associated with each DMCONFIG
field, the field type of each identifier, and when each field can be updated. All applicable field values are returned with the retrieval operations. Fields that are allowed and/or required for adding a record are described in DMCONFIG(5), and DM_MIB(5). Fields indicated below as key
are key fields that are used to uniquely identify a record within section. These key fields are required to be in the input buffer when updates are done and are not allowed to be updated dynamically. The Update
column indicates when a field can be updated. The possible values are:
-
Yes
—can be updated at any time. -
NoGW
—cannot be updated dynamically while the domain gateway group associated with the local domain access point is running. -
No
—cannot be updated dynamically while at least one domain gateway group is running.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_LOCAL Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_LOCAL
section (also known as the
DM_LOCAL_DOMAINS
section). At the dmadmin
operation prompt, enter 2
(LOCAL_DOMAINS
)
to access this section.
Table 1-4 DM_LOCAL Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_LDOM
|
String | NoGW | Key: local domain access point name |
TA_GWGRP
|
String | NoGW | - |
TA_TYPE
|
String | NoGW | Format: {TDOMAIN | SNAX | OSITP | OSITPX}
|
TA_DOMAINID
|
String | NoGW | With the improved DMCONFIG terminology, DOMAINID is known as ACCESSPOINTID .
|
TA_AUDITLOG
|
String | NoGW | - |
TA_BLOCKTIME
|
Numeric | NoGW | - |
TA_CONNECTION_POLICY
|
Numeric | NoGW | Format: |
TA_MAXRETRY
|
Numeric | NoGW | Companion parameter to TA_CONNECTION_POLICY
|
TA_RETRY_INTERVAL
|
Numeric | NoGW | Companion parameter to TA_CONNECTION_POLICY
|
TA_DMTLOGDEV
|
String | NoGW | - |
TA_DMTLOGNAME
|
String | NoGW | - |
TA_DMTLOGSIZE
|
Numeric | NoGW | - |
TA_MAXRDTRAN
|
Numeric | NoGW | With the improved DMCONFIG terminology, MAXRDTRAN is known as MAXRAPTRAN .
|
TA_MAXTRAN
|
Numeric | NoGW | - |
TA_MAXRDOM
|
Numeric | NoGW | Applicable to OSITP only; with the improved DMCONFIG terminology, MAXRDOM is known as MAXACCESSPOINT
|
TA_SECURITY
|
String | NoGW | TDOMAIN (TDomain) format: SNAX (SNA) format: {NONE|DM_USER_PW} OSITPX (OSI TP 4.x) format: {NONE|DM_PW}
|
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_REMOTE Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_REMOTE
section (also known as the
DM_REMOTE_DOMAINS
section). At the
dmadmin
operation prompt, enter 3
(REMOTE_DOMAINS
) to access this section.
Table 1-5 DM_REMOTE Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_RDOM
|
String | No | Key: remote domain access point name |
TA_TYPE
|
String | No | Format: {TDOMAIN | SNAX | OSITP | OSITPX}
|
TA_DOMAINID
|
String | No | With the improved DMCONFIG terminology, DOMAINID is known as ACCESSPOINTID .
|
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_TDOMAIN Section
The DM_TDOMAIN
section contains the network
addressing parameters required by TDOMAIN
type
domains. The following table lists the fields in this
section.
Table 1-6 DM_TDOMAIN Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_LDOM or TA_RDOM
|
String | No/NoGW | Key: local or remote domain access point name |
TA_LDOM(optional)***
|
String | No/NoGW | Can also be used together with TA_RDOM (only when TA_RDOM is used to establish the remote domain access point name) as an option to establish a TDomain session.
|
TA_DMFAILOVERSEQ***
|
Numeric | No/NoGW | Format: -1 <= num <= 32767 Specifies the failover sequence number and primary record for a TDomain session
|
TA_NWADDR
|
String | No/NoGW | Text (ASCII) format (no embedded NULL characters)
|
TA_NWDEVICE
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_CONNECTION_POLICY * **
|
String | No/NoGW | Format: |
TA_MAXRETRY *
|
Numeric | No/NoGW | Companion parameter to TA_CONNECTION_POLICY
|
TA_RETRY_INTERVAL *
|
Numeric | No/NoGW | Companion parameter to TA_CONNECTION_POLICY
|
TA_TCPKEEPALIVE *
|
String | No/NoGW | Format: {LOCAL | N | Y} Domains TCP-level keepalive
|
* Available in Oracle Tuxedo release 8.1 or later.
** Takes precedence over same parameter in DM_LOCAL section. *** Available in Oracle Tuxedo release 9.0 or later. |
|||
TA_KEEPALIVE *
|
Numeric | No/NoGW | Format: -1 <= 2147483647 msec, rounded up to sec} Domains application-level keepalive |
TA_KEEPALIVEWAIT *
|
Numeric | No/NoGW | Format: 0 <= 2147483647 msec, rounded up to sec} Companion parameter to TA_KEEPALIVE
|
* Available in Oracle Tuxedo release 8.1 or later.
** Takes precedence over same parameter in DM_LOCAL section. *** Available in Oracle Tuxedo release 9.0 or later. |
For a local domain access point identifier
(TA_LDOM
), the TA_NWADDR
and
TA_NWDEVICE
fields can be updated if the gateway group
associated with that local domain access point is not running.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_OSITP Section
The DM_OSITP
section contains the network
addressing parameters for OSI TP 1.3 required by OSITP
type domains. The following table lists the fields in this
section.
Table 1-7 DM_OSITP Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_LDOM or TA_RDOM
|
String | No/NoGW | Key: local or remote domain access point name |
TA_APT
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_AEQ
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_AEQ
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_ACN
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_APID
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_AEID
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_PROFILE
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
For a local domain access point identifier
(TA_LDOM
), the other fields in this table can be
updated if the gateway group associated with that local domain
access point is not running.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_OSITPX Section
The DM_OSITPX
section contains the network
addressing parameters for OSI TP 4.0 or later required by
OSITPX
type domains. The following table lists
the fields in this section.
Note:
You must be running Oracle Tuxedo release 8.0 or later to be able to use theDM_OSITPX
section.
Table 1-8 DM_OSITPX Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_LDOM or TA_RDOM
|
String | No/NoGW | Key: local or remote domain access point name |
TA_AET
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_NWADDR
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_TSEL
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_DNSRESOLUTION
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_PSEL
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_SSEL
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_TAILORPATH
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_MINENCRYPTBITS
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_MAXENCRYPTBITS
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_MULTIPLEXING
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_XATMIENCODING
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_EXTENSIONS
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
TA_OPTIONS
|
String | No/NoGW | - |
For a local domain access point identifier
(TA_LDOM
), the other fields in this table can be
updated if the gateway group associated with that local domain
access point is not running.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_EXPORT Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_EXPORT
section (also known as the
DM_LOCAL_SERVICES
section). At the
dmadmin
operation prompt, enter 4
(LOCAL_SERVICES
) to access this section.
Table 1-9 DM_EXPORT Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_SERVICENAME
|
String | No | Key: name of local service to be exported; in an Oracle Tuxedo CORBA environment, the domain name of the local domain as given in the local UBBCONFIG file, where service is of the form "//domain_name"
|
TA_LDOM
|
String | Yes | Key: local domain access point name. With the improved DMCONFIG terminology, LDOM is known as LACCESSPOINT .
|
TA_ACLNAME
|
String | Yes | - |
TA_CONV
|
String | NoGW | Format: {Y | N}
|
TA_RNAME
|
String | Yes | Applicable to TDOMAIN , SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX
|
TA_BUFTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX
|
TA_BUFSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX ; “S” in BUFSTYPE stands for “subtyp
|
TA_OBUFTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX
|
TA_OBUFSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX ; “S” in OBUFSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
TA_COUPLING
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_INRECTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_INRECSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only; “S” in INRECSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
TA_OUTRECTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_OUTRECSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only; “S” in OUTRECSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_IMPORT Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_IMPORT
section (also known as the
DM_REMOTE_SERVICES
section). At the
dmadmin
operation prompt, enter 5
(REMOTE_SERVICES
) to access this section.
Table 1-10 DM_IMPORT Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_SERVICENAME
|
String | No | Key: name of remote service to be imported; in an Oracle Tuxedo CORBA environment, the domain name of a remote domain as given in the remote UBBCONFIG file, where service is of the form "//domain_name"
|
TA_RDOM
|
String | No | Key: remote domain access point name. With the improved DMCONFIG terminology, RDOM is known as RACCESSPOINT .
|
TA_LDOM
|
String | No | Key: local domain access point name. With the improved DMCONFIG terminology, LDOM is known as LACCESSPOINT .
|
TA_CONV
|
String | NoGW | Format: {Y | N}
|
TA_LOAD
|
Numeric | - | - |
TA_RNAME
|
String | - | Applicable to TDOMAIN , SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX
|
TA_ROUTINGNAME
|
String | - | - |
TA_BUFTYPE
|
String | - | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX
|
TA_BUFSTYPE
|
String | - | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX ; “S” in BUFSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
TA_OBUFTYPE
|
String | - | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX
|
TA_OBUFSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to SNAX , OSITP , and OSITPX ; “S” in OBUFSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
TA_AUTOPREPARE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_INRECTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_INRECSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only; “S” in INRECSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
TA_OUTRECTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_OUTRECSTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only; “S” in OUTRECSTYPE stands for “subtype”
|
TA_TPSUTTYPE
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
TA_REMTPSUT
|
String | Yes | Applicable to OSITPX only
|
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_EVT_IN Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_EVT_IN
section.
Table 1-11 DM_EVT_IN Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_EVTNAME
|
String | No | Key: Name of the local event to be received |
TA_LDOM
|
String | Yes | Key: Name of local domain access point |
TA_ACLNAME
|
String | Yes | N/A |
TA_EVT_EXPR
|
String | Yes | N/A |
TA_EVT_FILTER
|
String | Yes | N/A |
TA_REVTNAME
|
String | Yes | N/A |
Note:
All the FIELDS definitions have been defined within "$TUXDIR/udataobj/dmadmin
" and "$TUXDIR/udataobj/dmadmin32
".
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_EVT_OUT Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_EVT_OUT
Section.
Table 1-12 DM_EVT_OUT Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_EVTNAME
|
String | No | Key: Name of the remote event to be sent out |
TA_LDOM
|
String | No | Key: Name of local domain access point |
TA_RDOM
|
String | No | Key: Name of remote domain access point |
TA_PRIO
|
Short | Yes | N/A |
TA_EVT_TRAN
|
String | Yes | N/A |
TA_EVT_EXPR
|
String | Yes | N/A |
TA_EVT_FILTER
|
String | Yes | N/A |
TA_REVTNAME
|
String | Yes | N/A |
Note:
All the FIELDS definitions have been defined within "$TUXDIR/udataobj/dmadmin
" and "$TUXDIR/udataobj/dmadmin32
".
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_ROUTING Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_ROUTING
section.
Table 1-13 DM_ROUTING Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_ROUTINGNAME
|
String | No | Key:name of routing criteria table |
TA_FIELD
|
String | Yes | - |
TA_RANGE
|
String | Yes | - |
TA_BUFTYPE
|
String | Yes | - |
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_ACCESS_ CONTROL Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_ACCESS_CONTROL
section.
Table 1-14 DM_ACCESS_CONTROL Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_ACLNAME
|
String | No | Key: access control list name |
TA_RDOM
|
String | Yes | Key: remote domain access point name |
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuring the DM_PASSWORDS Section
The following table lists the fields in the
DM_PASSWORDS
section. This section only applies to
TDomain gateways.
Table 1-15 DM_PASSWORDS Section
Field Identifier | Type | Update | Notes |
---|---|---|---|
TA_LDOM
|
String | No | Key: local domain access point name |
TA_RDOM
|
String | No | Key: remote domain access point name |
TA_LPWD
|
String | Yes | Format: {Y | N | U}
|
TA_RPWD
|
String | Yes | Format: {Y | N | U}
|
The TA_LPWD
and TA_RPWD
show the
existence of a defined password for the local and/or the remote
domain access point. Passwords are not displayed. If an
UPDATE
operation is selected, the value of the
corresponding field must be set to U
. The program will
then prompt with echo turned off for the corresponding
passwords.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Diagnostics in Configuration Mode
dmadmin
fails if it cannot allocate an FML typed
buffer, if it cannot determine the /etc/passwd
entry
for the user, or if it cannot reset the environment variables
FIELDTBLS
or FLDTBLDIR
.
The return value printed by dmadmin
after each
operation completes indicates the status of the requested
operation. There are three classes of return values.
The following return values indicate a problem with permissions or an Oracle Tuxedo communications error. They indicate that the operation did not complete successfully.
-
[
TAEPERM
] - The calling process specified an
ADD
,UPDATE
, orDELETE
operation but it is not running as the Oracle Tuxedo administrator. Update operations must be run by the administrator (that is, the user specified in theUID
attribute of theRESOURCES
section of theTUXCONFIG
file). -
[
TAESYSTEM
] - An Oracle Tuxedo error has occurred. The exact nature of the error is written to userlog(3c).
-
[
TAEOS
] - An operating system error has occurred.
-
[
TAETIME
] - A blocking timeout occurred. The input buffer was not updated so no information was returned for retrieval operations. The status of update operations can be checked by doing a retrieval on the record that was being updated.
The following return values indicate a problem in doing the
operation itself and generally are semantic problems with the
application data in the input buffer. The string field
TA_STATUS
will be set in the output buffer and will
contain short text describing the problem. The string field
TA_BADFLDNAME
will be set to the field name for the
field containing the value that caused the problem (assuming the
error can be attributed to a single field).
-
[
TAECONFIG
] - An error occurred while the
BDMCONFIG
file was being read. -
[
TAEDUPLICATE
] - The operation attempted to add a duplicate record.
-
[
TAEINCONSIS
] - A field value or set of field values are inconsistently specified.
-
[
TAENOTFOUND
] - The record specified for the operation was not found.
-
[
TAENOSPACE
] - The operation attempted to do an update but there was not
enough space in the
BDMCONFIG
file. -
[
TAERANGE
] - A field value is out of range or is invalid.
-
[
TAEREQUIRED
] - A field value is required but not present.
-
[
TAESIZE
] - A field value for a string field is too long.
-
[
TAEUPDATE
] - The operation attempted to do an update that is not allowed.
The following return values indicate that the operation was successful.
-
[
TAOK
] - The operation succeeded. No updates were made to the
BDMCONFIG
file. -
[
TAUPDATED
] - The operation succeeded. Updates were made to the
BDMCONFIG
file.
When using dmunloadcf
to print entries in the
configuration, optional field values are not printed if they are
not set (for strings) or 0 (for integers). These fields will always
appear in the output buffer when using dmadmin
. In
this way, it makes it easier for the administrator to retrieve an
entry and update a field that previously was not set. The entry
will have the field name followed by a tab but no field value.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Configuration Example
In the following example, dmadmin
is used to add a
new remote domain access point. For illustration purposes,
ed(1)
is used for the editor.
$ EDITOR=ed dmadmin
> config
Sections:
1) RESOURCES 2) LOCAL_DOMAINS
3) REMOTE_DOMAINS 4) LOCAL_SERVICES
5) REMOTE_SERVICES 6) ROUTING
7) ACCESS_CONTROL 8) PASSWORDS
9) TDOMAINS 10) OSITPS
11) SNADOMS 12) LOCAL_REMOTE_USER
13) REMOTE_USERS 14) SNACRMS
15) SNASTACKS 16) SNALINKS
19) OSITPX
q) QUIT
Enter Section [1]:
Enter Section [1]: 2
Operations:
1) FIRST 2) NEXT
3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD
5) UPDATE 6) DELETE
7) NEW_SECTION 8) QUIT
Enter Operation [1]: 4
Enter editor to add/modify fields [n]? y
a
TA_RDOM B05
TA_DOMAINID BA.BANK05
TA_TYPE TDOMAIN
.
w
53
q
Perform operation [y]? <return>
Return value TAUPDATED
Buffer contents:
TA_OPERATION 4
TA_SECTION 2
TA_DOMAINID BA.BANK05
TA_RDOM B05
TA_TYPE TDOMAIN
TA_STATUS Update completed successfully
Operations:
1) FIRST 2) NEXT
3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD
5) UPDATE 6) DELETE
7) NEW_SECTION 8) QUIT
Enter Operation [4]: 7
Section:
1) RESOURCES 2) LOCAL_DOMAINS
3) REMOTE_DOMAINS 4) LOCAL_SERVICES
5) REMOTE_SERVICES 6) ROUTING
7) ACCESS_CONTROL 8) PASSWORDS
9) TDOMAINS 10) OSITPS
11) SNADOMS 12) LOCAL_REMOTE_USER
13) REMOTE_USERS 14) SNACRMS
15) SNASTACKS 16) SNALINKS
19) OSITPX
q) QUIT
Enter Section [1]: 9
Operations:
1) FIRST 2) NEXT
3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD
5) UPDATE 6) DELETE
7) NEW_SECTION 8) QUIT
Enter Operation [6]: 4
Enter editor to add/modify fields [n]? y
a
TA_RDOM B05
TA_NWADDR 0x00020401c0066d05
TA_NWDEVICE /dev/tcp
.
w
55
q
Perform operation [y]? <return>
Return value TAUPDATED
Buffer contents:
TA_OPERATION 4
TA_SECTION 8
TA_RDOM B05
TA_NWADDR 0x00020401c0066d05
TA_NWDEVICE /dev/tcp
TA_STATUS Update completed successfully
Operations:
1) FIRST 2) NEXT
3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD
5) UPDATE 6) DELETE
7) NEW_SECTION 8) QUIT
Enter Operation [4]: 8
> quit
The dmadmin
program ends.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Security
If dmadmin
is run using the UID
of the
application administrator, it is assumed that the user is a trusted
user and security is bypassed. If dmadmin
is run with
another user ID, and the security option is enabled in the
TUXCONFIG
file, the corresponding application password
is required to start the dmadmin
program. If standard
input is a terminal, dmadmin
will prompt the user for
the password with echo turned off. If standard input is not a
terminal, the password is retrieved from the environment variable,
APP_PW
. If this environment variable is not specified
and an application password is required, dmadmin
will
fail to start.
When running with another user ID (other than the UID of the administrator) only a limited set of commands is available.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Environment Variables
dmadmin
resets the FIELDTBLS
and
FLDTBLDIR
environment variables to pick up the
${TUXDIR}/udataobj/dmadmin
field table. Hence, the
TUXDIR
environment variable must be set correctly.
If the application requires security and the standard input to
dmadmin
is not from a terminal, the
APP_PW
environment variable must be set to the
corresponding application password.
The TUXCONFIG
environment variable must be set to
the pathname of the Oracle Tuxedo configuration file.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
General Diagnostics
If the dmadmin
command is entered before the system
has been booted, the following message is displayed:
BBL and DMADM need to be booted before running dmadmin. Exiting...
dmadmin
then prompts for the corresponding
commands.
If an incorrect application password is entered or is not
available to a shell script through the environment, a log message
is generated, the following message is displayed, and the command
terminates:Invalid password entered.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Interoperability
dmadmin
must be installed on Oracle Tuxedo release
5.0 or later. Other nodes in the same domain with a release 5.0
gateway may be Oracle Tuxedo release 4.1 or later.
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
Portability
The dmadmin
administrative tool is supported on any
platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is
supported.
See Also:
-
dmloadcf(1)
,tmadmin(1)
in the Section 1 - Commands DMADM(5)
,DMCONFIG(5)
in the Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference- Using the Oracle Tuxedo Domains Component
- Using the Oracle Tuxedo TOP END Domain Gateway with ATMI Applications
Parent topic: dmadmin(1)
dmloadcf(1)
- Name
- Synopsis
- Description
- Domains Terminology Improvements
- Portability
- Environment Variables
- Examples
- Diagnostics
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
dmloadcf
—Parses a DMCONFIG
file
and loads a binary BDMCONFIG
configuration file.
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
Description
dmloadcf
reads a file or standard input that is in DMCONFIG
syntax, checks the syntax, and optionally loads a binary BDMCONFIG
configuration file. The BDMCONFIG
environment variable points to the pathname of the BDMCONFIG
file where the information must be stored.
dmloadcf
prints an error message if it finds any required section of the DMCONFIG
file missing. If a syntax error is found while the input file is being parsed, dmloadcf
exits without performing any updates to the BDMCONFIG
file.
dmloadcf
requires the existence of the $TUXDIR/udataobj/DMTYPE
file. This file defines valid domain types. If this file does not exist, dmloadcf
exits without performing any updates to the BDMCONFIG
file.
The effective user identifier of the person running dmloadcf
must match the UID
in the RESOURCES
section of the TUXCONFIG
file.
The -c
option to dmloadcf
causes the program to print the minimum amount of IPC resources needed for each local domain (gateway group) in this configuration. The BDMCONFIG
file is not updated.
The -n
option to dmloadcf
causes the program to do only syntax checking of the text DMCONFIG
file without updating the BDMCONFIG
file.
After syntax checking, dmloadcf
checks whether the file referenced by the BDMCONFIG
environment variable exists, is a valid Oracle Tuxedo file, and contains BDMCONFIG
tables. If these conditions are not true, dmloadcf
gives the user a chance to create and initialize the file by displaying the following prompt:
Initialize BDMCONFIG file: path
[y,q]?
Here path
is the complete filename of the BDMCONFIG
file. Prompting is suppressed if the standard input and output are not directed to a terminal, or if the -y
option is specified on the command line. Any response other than “y
” or “Y
” causes dmloadcf
to exit without creating a binary configuration file.
If the BDMCONFIG
file is not properly initialized, and the user has entered y
after the Initialize BDMCONFIG file
prompt, dmloadcf
creates the Oracle Tuxedo filesystem and creates the BDMCONFIG
tables. If the -b
option is specified on the command line, its argument defines the number of blocks for the device when the Oracle Tuxedo filesystem is created. If the value of the -b
option is large enough to hold the new BDMCONFIG
tables, dmloadcf
uses the specified value to create the new filesystem; otherwise, dmloadcf
prints an error message and exits. If the -b
option is not specified, dmloadcf
creates a new filesystem large enough to hold the BDMCONFIG
tables. The -b
option is ignored if the filesystem already exists. The -b
option is highly recommended if BDMCONFIG
is a raw device (that is, a device that has not been initialized). In this case, -b
must be used to set the number of blocks on the raw device. The -b
option is not recommended if BDMCONFIG
is a regular UNIX file.
If the BDMCONFIG
file has been initialized already, dmloadcf
ensures that the local domain described by that BDMCONFIG
file is not running. If a local domain is running, dmloadcf
prints an error message and exits. Otherwise, dmloadcf
, to confirm that the file must be overwritten, prompts the user with:
“Really overwrite BDMCONFIG file [y, q]?”
Prompting is suppressed if the standard input or output are not a terminal or if the -y
option is specified on the command line. Any response other than “y
” or “Y
” will cause dmloadcf
to exit without overwriting the file.
If the SECURITY
parameter is specified in the RESOURCES
section of the TUXCONFIG
file, dmloadcf
flushes the standard input, turns off terminal echo, and prompts the user for an application password as follows: Enter Application Password?
The password is limited to 30 characters. The option to load the text DMCONFIG
file via the standard input (rather than a file) cannot be used when this SECURITY
parameter is turned on. If the standard input is not a terminal, that is, if the user cannot be prompted for a password (as with a here
file, for example), the environment variable APP_PW
is accessed to set the application password. If the environment variable APP_PW
is not set with the standard input not a terminal, dmloadcf
will print an error message, generate a log message and fail to load the BDMCONFIG
file.
If no errors have occurred and all checks have passed, dmloadcf
loads the DMCONFIG
file into the BDMCONFIG
file. It overwrites all existing information found in the BDMCONFIG
tables.
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
Domains Terminology Improvements
For Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1 or later, the Domains MIB uses improved class and attribute terminology to describe the interaction between local and remote domains. The improved terminology has been applied to the DM_MIB
reference page, classes, and error messages, and to the DMCONFIG
reference page, section names, parameter names, and error messages. For details, see “Domains Terminology Improvements” in the DM_MIB(5) reference page.
For backwards compatibility, aliases are provided between the
DMCONFIG
terminology used prior to Oracle Tuxedo 7.1
and the improved Domains MIB terminology. In Oracle Tuxedo 7.1 or
later, dmloadcf
accepts both versions of the
DMCONFIG
terminology. By default,
dmunloadcf
generates a DMCONFIG
file that
uses the improved domains terminology. Use the -c
option of dmunloadcf
to generate a
DMCONFIG
file that uses the previous domains
terminology.
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
Portability
The dmloadcf
administrative tool is supported on
any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is
supported.
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
Environment Variables
The BDMCONFIG
environment variable must point to
the BDMCONFIG
file.
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
Examples
The following example shows how a binary configuration file is loaded from the bank.dmconfig
text file. The BDMCONFIG
device is created (or reinitialized) with 2000 blocks:
dmloadcf -b 2000 bank.dmconfig
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
Diagnostics
If an error is detected in the input, the offending line is printed to standard error, along with a message indicating the problem. If a syntax error is found in the DMCONFIG
file or the system is currently running, no information is updated in the BDMCONFIG
file and dmloadcf
exits with exit code 1.
If dmloadcf
is run on an active node, the following error message is displayed:
*** dmloadcf cannot run on an active node ***
If dmloadcf
is run by a person whose effective user identifier does not match the UID
specified in the TUXCONFIG
file, the following error message is displayed:
*** UID is not effective user ID ***
Upon successful completion, dmloadcf
exits with exit code 0. If the BDMCONFIG
file is updated, a userlog
message is generated to record this event.
See Also:
- dmunloadcf(1)
DMCONFIG(5)
,UBBCONFIG(5)
in the Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
- Using the Oracle Tuxedo Domains Component
- Using the Oracle Tuxedo TOP END Domain Gateway with ATMI Applications
Parent topic: dmloadcf(1)
dmunloadcf(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
dmunloadcf
—Unloads the binary
BDMCONFIG
Domains configuration file.
Parent topic: dmunloadcf(1)
Description
dmunloadcf
translates the BDMCONFIG
configuration file from the binary representation into text. This translation is useful for transporting the file in a compact way between machines with different byte orderings, and for making a backup copy of the file in a compact form for reliability. The text format is the same as that described in DMCONFIG(5).
dmunloadcf
reads values from the
BDMCONFIG
file referenced by the
BDMCONFIG
environment variable and writes them to
standard output.
For Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1 or later, dmunloadcf
,
by default, generates a DMCONFIG
file that uses the
improved domains terminology. For details, see the following
section, “Domains Terminology Improvements.” Use the
-c
option to generate a DMCONFIG
file
that uses the previous domains terminology.
Parent topic: dmunloadcf(1)
Domains Terminology Improvements
For Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1 or later, the Domains MIB uses improved class and attribute terminology to describe the interaction between local and remote domains. The improved terminology has been applied to the DM_MIB
reference page, classes, and error messages, and to the DMCONFIG
reference page, section names, parameter names, and error messages. For details, see “Domains Terminology Improvements” in the DM_MIB(5) reference page.
For backward compatibility, aliases are provided between the
DMCONFIG
terminology used prior to Oracle Tuxedo 7.1
and the improved Domains MIB terminology. In Oracle Tuxedo 7.1 or
later, dmloadcf
accepts both versions of the
DMCONFIG
terminology. By default,
dmunloadcf
, generates a DMCONFIG
file
that uses the improved domains terminology. Use the -c
option of dmunloadcf
to generate a
DMCONFIG
file that uses the previous domains
terminology.
Parent topic: dmunloadcf(1)
Portability
The dmunloadcf
command is supported on any platform
on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: dmunloadcf(1)
Examples
To unload the configuration in
/usr/tuxedo/BDMCONFIG
into the file
bdmconfig.backup
:
BDMCONFIG=/usr/tuxedo/BDMCONFIG dmunloadcf >bdmconfig.backup
Parent topic: dmunloadcf(1)
Diagnostics
dmunloadcf
checks that the file referenced by the
BDMCONFIG
environment variable exists, is a valid
Oracle Tuxedo filesystem, and contains BDMCONFIG
tables. If any of these conditions is not met,
dmunloadcf
prints an error message and exits with
error code 1. Upon successful completion, dmunloadcf
exits with exit code 0.
See Also:
- dmloadcf(1), DMCONFIG(5)
- Using the Oracle Tuxedo Domains Component
- Using the Oracle Tuxedo TOP END Domain Gateway with ATMI Applications
Parent topic: dmunloadcf(1)
gencat(1)
Description
The gencat
utility merges the message text source file(s) msgfile
into a formatted message database catfile
. The database catfile
is created if it does not already exist. If catfile
does exist its messages are included in the new catfile
. If set and message numbers collide, the new message text defined in msgfile
replaces the old message text currently contained in catfile
. The message text source file (or set of files) input to gencat
can contain either set and message numbers or simply message numbers, in which case the set NL_SETD
(see nl_types(5)) is assumed.
Note:
The fields of a message text source line are separated by a single ASCII space or tab character. Any other ASCII spaces or tabs are considered to be part of the subsequent field.-
$set n comment
- Where
n
specifies the set identifier of the following messages until the next$set
,$delset
, or end-of-file appears.n
must be a number in the range (1-{NL_SETMAX
}). Set identifiers within a single source file need not be contiguous. Any string following the set identifier is treated as a comment. If no$set
directive is specified in a message text source file, all messages are located in the default message set.NL_SETD
. -
$delset n comment
- Deletes message set
n
from an existing message catalog. Any string following the set number is treated as a comment. (Note: ifn
is not a valid set it is ignored.) -
$ comment
- A line beginning with a dollar symbol (
$
) followed by an ASCII space or tab character is treated as a comment. -
m message_text
- The
m
denotes the message identifier, which is a number in the range (1-{NL_MSGMAX
}). (Do not confuse this message text syntax with the-m
command line option described underNOTES
.) The message text is stored in the message catalog with the set identifier specified by the last$set
directive, and with message identifierm
. If the message text is empty, and an ASCII space or tab field separator is present, an empty string is stored in the message catalog. If a message source line has a message number, but neither a field separator nor message text, the existing message with that number (if any) is deleted from the catalog. Message identifiers need not be contiguous. The length of message text must be in the range (0-{NL_TEXTMAX
}). -
$quote c
- This line specifies an optional quote character
c
, which can be used to surround message text so that trailing spaces or null (empty) messages are visible in a message source line. By default, or if an empty$quote
directive is supplied, no quoting of message text is recognized. Empty lines in a message text source file are ignored. Text strings can contain the special characters and escape sequences defined in the following table.
Description | Symbol | Escape Sequence |
---|---|---|
Newline | NL(LF) | \n
|
Horizontal tab | HT | \t
|
Vertical tab | VT | \v
|
Backspace | BS | \b
|
Carriage return | CR | \r
|
Form feed | FF | \f
|
Backslash | \ | \\
|
Bit pattern | ddd | \ddd
|
The escape sequence \ddd
consists of a backslash followed by 1, 2, or 3 octal digits, which are taken to specify the value of the desired character. If the character following a backslash is not one of those specified, the backslash is ignored.
A backslash followed by an ASCII newline character is also used to continue a string on the following line. Thus, the following two lines describe a single message string:
1 This line continues \
to the next line
which is equivalent to:
1 This line continues to the next line
Parent topic: gencat(1)
Portability
gencat
is supported on any platform on which the
Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: gencat(1)
Notices
This version of gencat
produces a catalog that at
run time is read into malloc
’ed space. Shared
catalogs available with some versions of gencat
are
not available. On some systems, generation of
malloc
’ed catalogs requires that the
-m
option be specified. This option can be specified
on the command line, but has no effect.
malloc
’ed catalogs are the default; the
-m
option is supported for compatibility only.
The catalog file generated by this command is limited in size to 64K. Larger catalog files result in an error being reported by this command and no catalog file being generated.
See Also:
Parent topic: gencat(1)
genicf(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
Given the
idl-filename(s)
,
generates an ICF file that provides the code generation process
with additional information about policies on implementations and
the relationship between implementations and the interface they
implement. If an ICF file is provided as input to the
idl
command, the idl
command generates
server code for only the implementation/interface pairs specified
in the ICF file.
The generated ICF file has the same filename as the first
idl-filename
specified on the command line, but
with an .icf
extension.
If incorrect OMG IDL syntax is specified in
the
idl-filename(s)
file, appropriate errors are returned.
Parent topic: genicf(1)
Options
-
-D identifier=[definition]
- Performs the same function as the
#define
C++ preprocessor directive; that is, the-D
option defines a token string or a macro to be substituted for every occurrence of a given identifier in the definition file. If a definition is not specified, the identifier is defined as 1. Multiple-D
options can be specified. White space between the-D
option and the identifier is optional. -
-I pathname
- Specifies directories within which to search for include files, in addition to any directories specified with the
#include
OMG IDL preprocessor directive. Multiple directories can be specified by using multiple-I
options. -
-h and -?
- Provides help that explains the usage of the
genicf
command. No other action results.
Parent topic: genicf(1)
idl(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
idl
—Compiles the Object Management Group
(OMG) Interface Definition Language (IDL) file and generates the
files required for the interface.
Parent topic: idl(1)
Synopsis
idl [-i] [-D identifier [=value]] [-Ipathname][-h] [-P] [-T]
idl-filename... [icf-filename...]
Parent topic: idl(1)
Description
Given the provided idl-filename()
file(s) and optional icf-filename()
file(s), the idl
command generates the following files:
-
idl-filename _c.cpp
- Client stub (includes embedded user-defined data type functions).
-
idl-filename _c.h
- Class definitions for interfaces.
-
idl-filename _s.cpp
- Server skeleton containing an implementation of the
POA_skeleton
classes. -
idl-filename _s.h
-
POA_skeleton
class definitions. -
idl-filename _i.cpp
- Example version of the implementation. This file is generated
only when the
-i
option is given. -
idl-filename _i.h
- Class definition of an example implementation that inherits
from the
POA_skeleton
class. This file is generated only when the-i
option is given.
Note:
If any ICF files are specified, the information within the ICF files is used to provide the code generator with information about the interface/implementations that override the defaults. Typically, an activation policy and a transaction policy for an implementation may be specified in the ICF file. If no ICF files are specified, default policies are in effect for all of the interfaces specified in the OMG IDL file, and skeleton code for all of the interfaces is generated. If anicf-filename
is provided as input to the idl
command, only the implementation/interfaces specified in the icf-filename
are generated as part of the server.
The IDL compiler places the generated client stub information in the filename_c.cpp
and filename_c.h
files. The generated server skeleton information is placed in the filename_s.cpp
and filename_s.h
files.
The IDL compiler overwrites the generated client stub files (filename_c.cpp
and filename_c.h
), and the generated server skeleton files (filename_s.cpp
and filename_s.h
). Any previous versions are destroyed.
When using the -i
option, the IDL compiler overwrites the sample implementation class definition file (filename_i.h
). Previous versions are destroyed. The sample implementation file (filename_i.cpp
) is overwritten, however, any code contained within the code preservation blocks is preserved and restored in the newly generated file. To avoid the loss of data, it is recommended that you copy the sample implementation files (filename_i.h
and filename_i.cpp
) to a safe location before regenerating these files.
If an unknown option is passed to this command, the offending option and a usage message is displayed to the user, and the compile is not performed.
Parent topic: idl(1)
Options
-
-D identifier[=definition]
- Performs the same function as the
#define C++
preprocessor directive; that is, the-D
option defines a token string or a macro to be substituted for every occurrence of a given identifier in the definition file. If a definition is not specified, the identifier is defined as- Multiple
-D
options can be specified. White space between the-D
option and the name is optional.
- Multiple
-
-I pathname
- Specifies directories within which to search for include files,
in addition to any directories specified with the
#include
OMG IDL preprocessor directive. Multiple directories can be specified by using multiple-I
options. -
-i
- Results in
idl-filename_i.cpp
files being generated. These files contain example templates for the implementations that implement the interfaces specified in the OMG IDL file.Note:
When using theidl
command-i
option to update your implementation files, proceed as follows to update your implementation files:
- Back up your implementation files.
- If you are migrating from Oracle ObjectBroker to Oracle Tuxedo,
edit your generated implementation files to change the code
preservation block delimiters from
“OBB_PRESERVE_BEGIN”
and“OBB_PRESERVE_END”
to“M3_PRESERVE_BEGIN”
and“M3_PRESERVE_END”
. - If you added include files to your method implementation file
(
*_i.cpp
), edit the file and move the includes inside theINCLUDES
preservation block. - Regenerate your edited implementation files (using the
idl
command with the-i
option). - If you previously made modifications to the implementation
definition file (
*_i.h
), edit the newly generated definition file and add your modifications back in. Be sure to put your modifications inside the code preservation blocks so subsequent updates will automatically retain them. Pay particular attention to the implementation constructor and destructor functions; the function signatures changed in Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1. - If you previously made modifications outside the preservation
blocks of the method implementation file (
*_i.cpp
) or to the implementation constructor and destructor functions, edit the newly generated file and add those modifications. Be sure to put the modifications inside a preservation block so subsequent updates will automatically retain them.
-
-P
- Generates server code that uses the POA instead of the TP
Framework. With this option specified, the skeleton class does not
inherit from the TP Framework
Tobj_ServantBase
class, but instead inherits directly from thePortableServer::ServantBase
class. By default, the skeleton class uses the TP Framework. So you must use this switch when you are developing joint client/servers as these servers do not use the TP framework. -
-T
- Generates tie-based servant code that allows the use of delegation to tie an instance of a C++ implementation class to the servant. This option allows classes that are not related to skeletons by inheritance to implement CORBA object operations. This option is set to off by default.
-
-h or -?
- Provides help that explains the usage of the
idl
command. No other action results.
Parent topic: idl(1)
idl2ir(1)
Name
idl2ir
—Creates the Interface Repository and
loads interface definitions into it.
Parent topic: idl2ir(1)
Options
The options are as follows:
[-f repository-name] [-c]
[-D identifier[=definition]]
[-I pathname[-I pathname] [...]] [-N{i|e}]
Parent topic: idl2ir(1)
Description
Use this command to create the Interface Repository and to load it with interface definitions. If no repository file exists, this command creates it. If a repository file does exist, this command loads the specified interface definitions into it and, in effect, updates the file.
One of the side effects of doing this is that a new Interface Repository database file is created.
Parent topic: idl2ir(1)
Parameters
-
definition-filename-list
- A list of file specifications containing the repository definitions. These files are treated as one logical file and are loaded in one operation.
-
-f repository-name
- The filename of the Interface Repository file. If you do not
specify the
-f
option, theidl2ir
command createsrepository.ifr as the
Interface Repository file on UNIX systems andrepository_1.ifr
on Microsoft Windows 2003 systems. -
-c
- Indicates that a new repository is to be created. If a
repository exists and this option is specified, the
idl2ir
command ignores the existing repository and replaces it with a new one. If a repository exists and this option is not specified, theidl2ir
command updates the existing repository. -
-D identifier[=definition]
- Performs the same function as the
#define
preprocessor directive; that is, the-D
option defines a token string or a macro to be substituted for every occurrence of a given identifier in the definition file. If a definition is not specified, the identifier is defined as 1.You can specify multiple-D
options. -
-I pathname
- Specifies a directory within which to search for include files, in addition to any directories specified with the
#include
OMG IDL preprocessor directive.
Note:
Additional definitions loaded into the interface repository while the server process for the Interface Repository is running are not accepted until the server process for the Interface Repository is stopped and started again.Parent topic: idl2ir(1)
ir2idl(1)
Options
The options are as follows:
[-f repository-name] [-n]
[-t interface-type] [-o filename]
Parent topic: ir2idl(1)
Description
This command shows the contents of an Interface Repository. By
directing the output to a file with the -o
option, you
can extract the OMG IDL file from the repository. By default, the
repository file is repository.ifr
.
Parent topic: ir2idl(1)
Parameters
-
interface-name
- The name of the interface whose contents are to be shown. If you do not specify an interface name, all interfaces in the repository are shown.
-
-f repository-name
- The name of the repository to search for the interface
definitions. If you do not specify the
-f
option,repository.ifr
is used. -
-n
- Specifies that the output must not include those objects that were inherited.
-
-t interface-type
- Indicates the type of objects to display. The object type must be one of the following keywords:
-
-o filename
- The file specification for the file in which to write the retrieved OMG IDL statements. The default is standard output.
Parent topic: ir2idl(1)
irdel(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
This command deletes the specified interface from the
repository. Only interfaces not referenced from another interface
can be deleted. By default, the repository file is
repository.ifr
.
Parent topic: irdel(1)
Parameters
-
-f repository-name
- An optional parameter that specifies an Interface Repository.
The
repository-name
value is the file specification of an Interface Repository. If this option is not specified, therepository.ifr
is used as the default. -
-i id
- The repository
id
for the specified object. Theid
is used as a secondary level of lookup. If theid
does not match theid
of the named object, the object is not deleted. -
object-name
- The name of the interface to delete from the repository. The
name can be a simple object name or a scoped name, for example,
MOD1::INTERF2::OP3
(operationOP3
is within interfaceINTERF2
, which is in applicationMOD1
).
Parent topic: irdel(1)
mkfldcs, mkfldcs32(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
mkfldcs
, mkfldcs32
—Creates C#
header files from field tables
Parent topic: mkfldcs, mkfldcs32(1)
Synopsis
mkfldcs [-d outdir] [ field_table... ]
mkfldcs32 [-d outdir] [ field_table... ]
Parent topic: mkfldcs, mkfldcs32(1)
Description
mkfldcs
is similar to mkfldhdr
except
its output file is used to generate C# source files which contain
public classes including the definitions for every FML field ID
provided in the input files.
The mkfldcs
command line options are the same as mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1). mkfldcs32
is used for 32-bit FML.
See Also:
- Creating Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client Applications in Using the Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client
Parent topic: mkfldcs, mkfldcs32(1)
mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
mkfldhdr
, mkfldhdr32
—Creates
header files from field tables.
Parent topic: mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
Synopsis
mkfldhdr [-d outdir] [ field_table... ]
mkfldhdr32 [-d outdir] [ field_table... ]
Parent topic: mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
Description
mkfldhdr
translates each field table file to a
corresponding header file suitable for inclusion in C programs. The
resulting header files provide #define
macros for
converting from field names to field IDs. Header filenames are
formed by concatenating a .h
to the simple filename
for each file to be converted.
The field table names may be specified on the command line; each file is converted to a corresponding header file.
If the field table names are not given on the command line, the
program uses the FIELDTBLS
environment variable as the
list of field tables to be converted, and FLDTBLDIR
environment variable as a list of directories to be searched for
the files. FIELDTBLS
specifies a comma-separated list
of field table filenames. If FIELDTBLS
has no value,
fld.tbl
is used as the name of the (only) field table
file (in this case, the resulting header file will be
(fld.tbl.h
).
The FLDTBLDIR
environment variable is a
colon-separated list of directories in which to look for each field
table whose name is not an absolute pathname; the search for field
tables is very similar to the search for executable commands using
the UNIX system PATH
variable. If
FLDTBLDIR
is not defined, only the current directory
is searched. Thus, if no field table names are specified on the
command line and FIELDTBLS
and FLDTBLDIR
are not set, mkfldhdr
will convert the field table
fld.tbl
in the current directory into the header file
fld.tbl.h
.
mkfldhdr32
is used for 32-bit FML. It uses the
FIELDTBLS32
and FLDTBLDIR32
environment
variables.
Parent topic: mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
Errors
Error messages are printed if the field table load fails or if an output file cannot be created.
Parent topic: mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
Examples
FLDTBLDIR=/project/fldtbls
FIELDTBLS=maskftbl,DBftbl,miscftbl,
export FLDTBLDIR FIELDTBLS
mkfldhdr
produces the #include
files
maskftbl.h
, DBftbl.h
, and
miscftbl.h
in the current directory by processing the
files maskftbl
, DBftbl
, and
miscftbl
in directory
/project/fldtbls
.
With environment variables set as in the example above, the command mkfldhdr -d $FLDTBLDIR processes
the same input field-table files, and produces the same output files, but places them in the directory given by the value of the environment variable FLDTBLDIR
.
The command mkfldhdr myfields processes
the input file myfields
and produces myfields.h
in the current directory.
See Also:
- Introduction to FML Functions in Oracle Tuxedo ATMI FML Function Reference, field_tables(5)
Parent topic: mkfldhdr, mkfldhdr32(1)
mklanginfo(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
This program takes the file specified as an argument, and converts the input into a file suitable for placement in $TUXDIR/locale
/xx/LANGINFO
where xx
is a specific locale. The standard input is used if a file argument is not specified. The language values are used by setlocale(3c)
, strftime(3c)
, and nl_langinfo(3c)
in the Section 3c - C Functions .
mklanginfo
reads input lines, ignoring lines that begin with white space or ‘#’. Value input lines must be of the form:
<token> = “value”
The characters between the token
and the double-quoted value
can be anything but a double quote as long as white space appears after the token. If 0value
is the null string, the line is ignored. Otherwise, token
must be either an integer between 1 and 48, inclusive, or a string, as follows:
Integer String Value 1
DAY_1 Day 1 of the week, for example, Sunday 2
DAY_2 Day 2 of the week, for example, Monday 3
DAY_3 Day 3 of the week, for example, Tuesday 4
DAY_4 Day 4 of the week, for example, Wednesday 5
DAY_5 Day 5 of the week, for example, Thursday 6
DAY_6 Day 6 of the week, for example, Friday 7
DAY_7 Day 7 of the week, for example, Saturday 8
ABDAY_1 Abbreviated day 1 of the week, for example, Sun 9
ABDAY_2 Abbreviated day 2 of the week, for example, Mon 10
ABDAY_3 Abbreviated day 3 of the week, for example, Tue 11
ABDAY_4 Abbreviated day 4 of the week, for example, Wed 12
ABDAY_5 Abbreviated day 5 of the week, for example, Thu 13
ABDAY_6 Abbreviated day 6 of the week, for example, Fri 14
ABDAY_7 Abbreviated day 7 of the week, for example, Sat 15
MON_1 Month 1 of the year, for example, January 16
MON_2 Month 2 of the year, for example, February 17
MON_3 Month 3 of the year, for example, March 18
MON_4 Month 4 of the year, for example, April 19
MON_5 Month 5 of the year, for example, May 20
MON_6 Month 6 of the year, for example, June 21
MON_7 Month 7 of the year, for example, July 22
MON_8 Month 8 of the year, for example, August 23
MON_9 Month 9 of the year, for example, September 24
MON_10 Month 10 of the year, for example, October 25
MON_11 Month 11 of the year, for example, November 26
MON_12 Month 12 of the year, for example, December 27
ABMON_1 Abbreviated month 1 of the year, for example, Jan 28
ABMON_2 Abbreviated month 2 of the year, for example, Feb 29
ABMON_3 Abbreviated month 3 of the year, for example, Mar 30
ABMON_4 Abbreviated month 4 of the year, for example, Apr 31
ABMON_5 Abbreviated month 5 of the year, for example, May 32
ABMON_6 Abbreviated month 6 of the year, for example, Jun 33
ABMON_7 Abbreviated month 7 of the year, for example, Jul 34
ABMON_8 Abbreviated month 8 of the year, for example, Aug 35
ABMON_9 Abbreviated month 9 of the year, for example, Sep 36
ABMON_10 Abbreviated month 10 of the year, for example, Oct 37
ABMON_11 Abbreviated month 11 of the year, for example, Nov 38
ABMON_12 Abbreviated month 12 of the year, for example, Dec 39
RADIXCHAR Radix character, for example, '.' 40
THOUSEP Separator for thousands 41
YESSTR Affirmative response string, for example, yes 42
NOSTR Negative response string, for example, no 43
CRNCYSTR Currency symbol 44
D_T_FMT string for formatting date and time, for example, “%a%b%d%H:%M:0Y” 45
D_FMT string for formatting date, for example, “%m/%d/%y” 46
T_FMT string for formatting time, for example, “H:%M:%S” 47
AM_FMT Ante Meridian affix, for example, AM 48
PM_FMT Post Meridian affix, for example, PM
The input lines may appear in any order. If an input line appears more than once for the same value, the last line for that value is used.
After processing the file, mklanginfo
prints the string name and string value for each language information constant shown in the previous code listing to the standard error in the order specified in the listing. The null string is used as a value for any language information constant not specified; nl_langinfo
uses the default value for the C locale (U.S. English values) for these unset constants.
If a filename is specified on the command name, mklanginfo
writes the compiled
output to fname
.out
; otherwise, the output is written to the standard output. The format is a list of all of the null-terminated string values (without newlines).
Parent topic: mklanginfo(1)
Diagnostic
If an error occurs in reading the file or in the syntax, an error message is printed to the standard error and the program exits with exit code 1. On success, the program exits with exit code 0.
Parent topic: mklanginfo(1)
Examples
The defaults for the Oracle Tuxedo system (locale C) are located
in $TUXDIR/locale/C/lang.text
. To provide French
values, an administrator might do the following (on a UNIX system
platform):
mkdir $TUXDIR/locale/french
cd $TUXDIR/locale/french
cp $TUXDIR/locale/C/lang.text .
ed lang.text
convert to French values
w
q
mklanginfo lang.text > LANGINFO
Parent topic: mklanginfo(1)
Files
$TUXDIR/locale/C/lang.text
—the default values
for the C locale
$TUXDIR/locale/C/LANGINFO
—the
“compiled” file for the C locale
$TUXDIR/locale/xx/LANGINFO
—the
“compiled” file for the
xx
locale
Parent topic: mklanginfo(1)
Notices
The mklanginfo
command and the resulting
LANGINFO
file are needed only if the Oracle Tuxedo
system compatibility functions for setlocale()
,
strftime()
, or nl_langinfo()
are used.
The functions provided with the UNIX system use a different set and
format of files.
See Also:
nl_langinfo(3c)
,setlocale(3c)
,strftime(3c)
in Section 3c - C FunctionsSection 3c - C Functionslanginfo(5)
in Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference
Parent topic: mklanginfo(1)
qmadmin(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
With the commands listed in this entry, qmadmin
supports the creation, inspection, and modification of message
queues. The universal device list (UDL) maps the physical storage
space on a machine on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system is run.
An entry in the UDL points to the disk space in which the queues
and messages of a queue space are stored. The name of the device
(file) on which the UDL resides (or will reside) for the queue
space may be specified either as a command line argument or via the
environment variable QMCONFIG
. If both are specified,
the command option is used.
As a system-provided command, qmadmin
does not
undergo normal initialization, so it does not pick up the value of
ULOGPFX
from the UBBCONFIG
file. As a
result, any log entries generated by qmadmin
commands
are written to the current working directory. This is corrected by
setting and exporting the ULOGPFX
environment variable
to the pathname of the directory in which the userlog is
located.
qmadmin
uses the greater than sign
(>
) as a prompt. Arguments are entered separated by
white space (tabs and/or spaces). Arguments that contain white
space may be enclosed within double quotes; if an argument enclosed
within double quotes contains a double quote, the internal double
quote must be preceded with a backslash. Commands prompt for
required information if it is not given on the command line. A
warning message is displayed and the prompt shown again, if a
required argument is not entered. Commands do not prompt for
information on optional parameters.
A user can exit the program by entering q
or
<CTRL-d>
when prompted for a command. Output
from a command may be terminated by pressing BREAK; the program
then prompts for the next command. Hitting return when prompted for
a command repeats the previously executed command, except after a
break.
Note:
There is no way to effectively cancel a command once you press RETURN; hitting BREAK only terminates output from the command, if any. Therefore, be sure that you type a command exactly as you intended before pressing RETURN.Output from qmadmin
commands is paginated according
to the pagination command in use (see the paginate
subcommand below).
When qmadmin
is initially entered, no queue space
is opened. To create a queue space, run qspacecreate
;
to open it, run qopen
. The qaborttrans
,
qclose
, qchangeprio
,
qchangequeue
, qchangetime
,
qchangeexptime
, qcommittrans
,
qchange
, qcreate
,
qdeletemsg
, qinfo
, qlist
,
qprinttrans
and qset
commands can be
executed only when a queue space is open.
The following table lists the qmadmin
commands
grouped by functional type.
Command Type | Command | Purpose |
---|---|---|
General | ||
echo
|
Echoes input command lines | |
help
|
Prints help messages | |
paginate
|
Paginates output | |
quit
|
Terminates the session | |
verbose
|
Produces output in verbose mode | |
! shellcommand
|
Escapes to shell and executes shellcommand
|
|
!!
|
Repeats previous shell command | |
#
|
Indicates comment lines | |
<CR>
|
Repeats the last command | |
Queue Space | ||
chdl
|
Changes the name for a universal device list entry | |
crdl
|
Creates an entry in the universal device list | |
dsdl
|
Destroys an entry found in the universal device list | |
ipcrm
|
Removes IPC data structures used for the queue space | |
ipcs
|
Lists IPC data structures used for the queue space | |
lidl
|
Prints the universal device list | |
livtoc
|
Prints information for all VTOC table entries | |
qaddext
|
Adds an extent to the queue space | |
qclose
|
Closes the currently open queue space | |
qopen
|
Opens and initializes structures for the queue space | |
qsize
|
Computes the size of shared memory needed for a queue space | |
qspacechange
|
Changes the parameters for a queue space | |
qspacecreate
|
Creates a queue space for queued messages | |
qspacedestroy
|
Destroys the named queue space | |
qspacedestroy
|
Lists the creation parameters for the queue space | |
Queue | ||
qchange
|
Modifies a queue in the currently open queue space | |
qcreate
|
Creates a queue in the currently open queue space | |
qdestroy
|
Destroys the named queue | |
qinfo
|
Lists information for associated queue or for all queues | |
Message | ||
qchangeexp
|
Changes the expiration time for messages on a queue | |
qchangeprio
|
Changes the priority for messages on a queue | |
qchangequeue
|
Moves messages to a different queue within the same queue space | |
qchangetime
|
Changes the execution time for messages on a queue | |
qdeletemsg
|
Deletes messages from a queue | |
qlist
|
Lists messages on a queue | |
qscan
|
Sets selection criteria used by other commands | |
qset
|
Sets the queue name used by other commands | |
Transaction | ||
qaborttrans
|
Aborts a precommitted transaction | |
qcommittrans
|
Commits a precommitted transaction | |
qprinttrans
|
Prints transaction table information for outstanding transactions |
Parent topic: qmadmin(1)
qmadmin Commands
Commands may be entered either by their full name or their abbreviation (if available, the abbreviation is listed below in parentheses following the full name), followed by any appropriate arguments. Arguments appearing in square brackets ([]) are optional; those in curly braces ({}) indicate a selection from mutually exclusive options.
-
chdl [dlindex [newdevice]]
- Changes the name for a universal device list entry. The first argument is the index of the device on the universal device list that is to be changed (device indexes are returned by lidl). The program prompts for it if it is not provided on the command line.
-
crdl [device [offset [size]]]
- Creates an entry in the universal device list. Note: The first
entry in the device list must correspond to the device that is
referenced by
QMCONFIG
and must have an offset of 0. If arguments are not provided on the command line, the program prompts for them. -
dsdl [-y] [dlindex]
- Destroys an entry found in the universal device list. The
dlindex
argument is the index on the universal device list of the device that is to be removed from the device list. If it is not provided on the command line, the program prompts for it. Entry 0 cannot be removed until allVTOC
files and other device list entries are destroyed. (Because entry 0 contains the device that holds the device list and table of contents, destroying it also destroys these two tables.)VTOC
files can be removed only by removing the associated entities (for example, by destroying a queue space that resides on the device). The program prompts for confirmation unless-y
is specified. -
echo (e) [{off | on}]
- Echoes input command lines when set to
on
. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting isoff
. -
help (h) [{command | all}]
- Prints help messages. If a
command
is specified, the abbreviation, arguments, and description for that command are printed. Theall
argument causes a description of all commands to be displayed. -
ipcrm [-f] [-y] [queue_space_name]
- Removes the IPC data structures used for the specified queue
space. If a queue space name is not provided on the command line,
the program prompts for one. If the specified queue space is open
in
qmadmin
, it will be closed.ipcrm
knows all IPC resources used by the queue space and is the only way that the IPC resources must be removed.qmadmin
ensures that no other processes are attached to the queue space before removing the IPC resources. The-f
option can be specified to force removal of IPC resources even if other processes are attached. This command prompts for confirmation before execution if the-f
option is specified, unless the-y
option is specified. All non-persistent messages in the specified queue space are permanently lost when this command completes successfully. -
ipcs [queue_space_name]
- Lists the IPC data structures used for a queue space, if any (none may be used if the queue space is not opened by any process). If a queue space name is not provided on the command line, the program prompts for one.
-
lidl [dlindex]
- Prints the universal device list. For each device the following
is listed: the index, the name, the starting block, and the number
of blocks on the device. In verbose mode, a map is printed that
shows free space (starting address and size of free space). If
dlindex
is specified, only the information for that device list entry is printed. -
livtoc
- Prints information for all
VTOC
table entries. The information printed for each entry includes the name of theVTOC
table, the device on which it is found, the offset of theVTOC
table from the beginning of the device and the number of pages allocated for that table. There are a maximum of 100 entries in theVTOC
. -
paginate (page) [{off|on}]
- Paginates output. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting is on, unless either standard input or standard output is a non-terminal device. Pagination may be turned on only when both standard input and standard output are terminal devices.
-
qaborttrans (qabort) [-y] [tranindex]
- Heuristically aborts the precommitted transaction associated
with the specified transaction index,
tranindex
. If the transaction index is not specified on the command line, the program prompts for it. If the transaction is known to be decided and the decision was to commit,qaborttrans
fails. The index is taken from the previous execution of theqprinttrans
command. Confirmation is requested unless the-y
option is specified. This command must be used with care. -
qaddext [queue_space_name [pages]]
- Adds an extent to the queue space. The maximum number of queue
space is 36. The queue space must not be active (no processes can
be attached to the queue space). If a queue space name and the
number of additional physical pages to allocate for the queue space
are not specified on the command line, the program prompts for
them. If the specified queue space is open in
qmadmin
, it will be closed. The number of physical pages is rounded down to the nearest multiple of four pages (see qspacecreate for clarification and examples). Space is allocated from extents defined in theUDL
associated with theQMCONFIG
device. Each new queue space extent uses an additional entry in theVTOC
(a maximum of 100 entries are available). The queue manager names the extents such that they can be identified quickly and associated with the queue space. All non-persistent messages in the specified queue space are permanently lost when this command completes successfully. -
qchange [-dpersist|nonpersist] [-nnhigh , nlow , ncmd] [-e default_relative_expiration_time] [queue_name [out-of-order [retries [delay [high [low [cmd]]]]]]]
- Modifies a queue in the currently open queue space. The
required arguments may be given on the command line or the program
will prompt for them. These are the queue name, whether
out-of-order enqueuing is allowed (not allowed, top of queue, or
before a specified
msgid
); the number of retries and delay time in seconds between retries; and the high and low limits for execution of a threshold command and the threshold command itself for persistent messaging. -
qchangeexp (qce) -y [newtime]
- Changes the expiration time for messages on a queue. When a message expires, it is removed from the queue, all resources used by the message are reclaimed by the system, and the relevant statistics are updated. If the expiration time is before the message availability time, the message is not available for dequeuing unless either the availability or expiration time is changed so that the availability time is before the expiration time. In addition, these messages are removed from the queue at expiration time even if they were never available for dequeuing. If a message expires during a transaction, the expiration does not cause the transaction to fail. Messages that expire while being enqueued or dequeued within a transaction are removed from the queue when the transaction ends. There is no notification when a message has expired.
-
qchangeprio (qcp) [-y] [newpriority]
- Changes the priority for messages on a queue. The queue that is
affected is set using the
qset
command and the selection criteria for limiting the messages to be updated are set using theqscan
command. -
qchangequeue (qcq) [-y] [newqueue]
- Moves messages to a different queue within the same queue
space. The queue from which messages are moved is set using the
qset
command and the selection criteria for limiting the messages to be moved are set using theqscan
command. If no selection criteria are set, all messages on the queue are moved: confirmation is requested before this is done unless the-y
option is specified. It is recommended that theqlist
command be executed to see what messages will be moved (this reduces typographical errors). Thenewqueue
value specifies the name of the queue to which messages will be moved. Ifnewqueue
is not specified on the command line, the program prompts for it. The delivery quality of service of a message is not changed to match the default delivery policy ofnewqueue
. -
qchangetime (qct) [-y] [newtime]
- Changes the message availability time for messages on a queue.
The queue is specified using the
qset
command. The selection criteria for limiting the messages to be updated are set using theqscan
command. -
qclose
- Closes the currently open queue space. All non-persistent messages in the specified queue space are permanently lost when this command completes successfully.
-
qcommittrans (qcommit) [-y] [tranindex]
- Heuristically commits the precommitted transaction associated
with the specified transaction index
tranindex
. The program will prompt for the transaction index if not specified on the command line. If the transaction is known to be decided and the decision was to abort,qcommittrans
will fail. The index is taken from the previous execution of theqprinttrans
command. Confirmation is requested unless the-y
option is specified. This command must be used with care. -
qcreate (qcr) [-dpersist|nonpersist] [-nnhigh,nlow,ncmd] [-e default_relative_expiration_time] [queue_name [qorder [out-of-order [retries [delay [high [low [cmd]]]]]]]]
- Creates a queue in the currently open queue space. The required
arguments may be given on the command line or the program will
prompt for them. These are the queue name, the queue ordering (fifo
or lifo, by expiration time, by priority, by time); whether
out-of-order enqueuing is allowed (not allowed, top of queue,
before a specified
msgid
); the number of retries and delay time in seconds between retries; the high and low limits for execution of a threshold command; and the threshold command itself for persistent messages. -
qdeletemsg (qdltm) [-y]
- Deletes messages from a queue. The queue is specified using the
qset
command. The selection criteria for limiting the messages to be deleted are set using theqscan
command. If no selection criteria are set, all messages on the queue are deleted: confirmation is requested before this is done. It is recommended that theqlist
command be executed to see what messages will be deleted (this reduces typographical errors). This command prompts for confirmation unless the-y
option is specified. -
qdestroy (qds) [{ -p | -f }] [-y] [queue_name]
- Destroys the named queue. By default, an error is returned if
requests exist on the queue or a process is attached to the queue
space. The
-p
option can be specified to “purge” any messages from the queue and destroy it, if no processes are attached to the queue space. The-f
option can be specified to “force” deletion of a queue, even if messages or processes are attached to the queue space; if a message is currently involved in a transaction the command fails and an error is written to theuserlog
. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-y
option is specified. -
qinfo [queue_name]
- Lists information for associated queue or for all queues. This command lists the following: the number of messages on the specified queue (or all queues if no argument is given); the amount of space used by the messages associated with the queue (both persistent and non-persistent); the number of messages being delivered persistently and non-persistently; the total number of messages in the specified queues, and the amount of space used by the persistent and non-persistent messages. In verbose mode, this command also lists the queue creation parameters for each queue, the default expiration for the queue (if any), the sort criteria, and the default delivery policy for the queue.
-
qlist (ql)
- Lists messages on a queue. The queue is specified using the
qset
command. The selection criteria for limiting the messages to be listed are set using theqscan
command. If no selection criteria are set, all messages on the queue will be listed. -
qopen [queue_space_name]
- Opens and initializes the internal structures for the specified
queue space. If a queue space is not specified on the command line,
the program prompts for it. If a queue space is already open in
qmadmin
, it is closed. -
qprinttrans (qpt)
- Prints transaction table information for currently outstanding
transactions. The information includes the transaction identifier,
an index used for aborting or committing transactions with
qaborttrans
orqcommittrans
, and the transaction status. -
qscan [{ [-t time1[-time2]] [-p priority1[-priority2]] [-m msgid] [-i corrid][-ddelivery_mode] [-etime1[-time2]] | none }]
- Sets the selection criteria used for the
qchangeprio
,qchangequeue
,qchangetime
,qdeletemsg
, andqlist
commands. An argument ofnone
indicates no selection criteria; all messages on the queue will be affected. Executing this command with no argument prints the current selection criteria values. When command line options give a value range (for example,-t
,-e
, or-p
) the value range may not contain white space. The-t
option can be used to indicate a time value or a time range. The format oftime1
andtime2
is:YY
[MM
[DD
[HH
[MM
[SS
]]]]] specifying the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. Units omitted from the date-time value default to their minimum possible values. For example, “7502” is equivalent to “750201000000.” The years 00-37 are treated as 2000-2037, years 70-99 are treated as 1970-1999, and 38-69 are invalid. The-p
option can be used to indicate a priority value or a priority range. Priority values are in the range 1 to 100, inclusive. The-m
option can be used to indicate a message identifier value, assigned to a message by the system when it is enqueued. The message identifier is unique within a queue and its value may be up to 32 characters in length. Values that are shorter than 32 characters are padded on the right with nulls (0x0). Backslash and non-printable characters (including white space characters such as space, newline, and tab) must be entered with a backslash followed by a two-character hexadecimal value for the character (for example, space is \20, as in “hello\20world
”). The-i
option can be used to indicate an correlation identifier value associated with a message. The identifier value is assigned by the application, stored with the enqueued message, and passed on to be stored with any reply or error message response such that the application can identify responses to particular requests. The value may be up to 32 characters in length. Values that are shorter than 32 characters are padded on the right with nulls (0x0). Backslash and non-printable characters (including white space characters such as space, newline, and tab) must be entered with a backslash followed by a two-character hexadecimal value for the character (for example, space is \20, as inmy\20ID\20value
). -
qset [queue_name]
- Sets the queue name that is used for the
qchangeprio
,qchangequeue
,qchangetime
,qdeletemsg
, andqlist
commands. Executing this command with no argument prints the current queue name. -
qsize [‑A actions] [‑H handles] [‑C cursors] [ ‑O owners] [‑Q tmp_queues] [‑f filter_memory] [-n nonpersistent_msg_memory[b,B]] [‑o overflow_memory][pages [queues [transactions [processes [messages]]]]]
- Computes the size of shared memory needed for a queue space
with the specified size in
pages
,queues
, (concurrent)transactions
,processes
, and (queued)messages
. If the values are not provided on the command line, the program prompts for them. The number of system semaphores needed is also printed. Valid values for the remaining options are described in theqspacecreate
option. -
qspacechange (qspch) [‑A actions] [‑H handles] [‑C cursors] [ ‑O owners] [‑Q tmp_queues] [‑f filter_memory] [-n nonpersistent_msg_memory[b,B]] [‑o overflow_memory][queue_space_name [ipckey [trans [procs [messages [errorq [inityn [blocking]]]]]]]]
- Changes the parameters for a queue space. The queue space must
not be active (that is, no processes can be attached to it). If the
required information is not provided on the command line, the
program prompts for it. Valid values are described in the
qspacecreate
section of this page. If the specified queue space is open inqmadmin
, it is closed. To add new extents,qaddext
must be used. The number of queues cannot be modified. -
qspacecreate (qspc) [‑A actions] [-n nonpersistent_msg_memory[b,B]] [‑o overflow_memory][queue_space_name [ipckey [pages [queues [trans [procs [messages [errorq [inityn [blocking]]]]]]]]]]
- Creates a queue space for queued messages. If not provided on
the command line, the program prompts for the following
information: the queue space name, the
ipckey
for the shared memory segment and semaphore; number of physical pages to allocate for the queue space; the number of queues; the number of concurrent transactions; the number of processes concurrently attached to the queue space; the number of messages that may be queued at one time; the name of an error queue for the queue space; whether or not to initialize pages on new extents for the queue space; and the blocking factor for doing queue space initialization and warm start disk input/output. -
qspacedestroy (qspds) [-f] [-y] [queue_space_name]
- Destroys the named queue space. If not provided on the command
line, the program will prompt for it. If the specified queue space
is open in
qmadmin
, it will be closed. By default, an error is returned if processes are attached to the queue space or if requests exist on any queues in the queue space. See theqdestroy
command for destroying queues that contain requests. The-f
option can be specified to “force” deletion of all queues, even if they may have messages or processes are attached to the queue space. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-y
option is specified. All non-persistent messages in the specified queue space are lost when this command completes successfully. -
(qspl) [queue_space_name]
- Lists the creation parameters for the queue space. If it is not specified on the command line, the program will prompt for it. If a queue space name is not entered, the parameters for the currently open queue space are printed. (An error occurs if a queue space is not open and a value is not entered.) In addition to printing the values for the queue space (as set when creating the queue space with
qspacecreate
or when they were last changed withqspacechange
), this command shows the sizes for all queue space extents. It also shows the amount of system-reserved memory as well as the total amount of configured shared memory. The amount of memory allocated for shared memory resources may not match the amount requested when the amount of memory is requested in bytes (b
); see the-n nonpersistent_msg_memory
option in "qspacecreate (qspc) [‑A actions] [-n nonpersistent_msg_memory[b,B]] [‑o overflow_memory][queue_space_name [ipckey [pages [queues [trans [procs [messages [errorq [inityn [blocking]]]]]]]]]]" for clarification and examples. -
quit (q)
- Terminates the session.
-
verbose (v) [{off | on}]
- Produces output in verbose mode. If no option is given, the
current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The
initial setting is
off
. -
! shellcommand
- Escapes to shell and execute
shellcommand
. -
!!
- Repeats previous shell command.
-
# [text]
- Lines beginning with
#
are comment lines and are ignored. - <CR>
- Repeats the last command.
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Example
The following sequence shows how to set up a queue.
$ QMCONFIG=/dev/rawfs qmadmin
qmadmin - Copyright (c) 1987 ATT; 1991 USL. All rights reserved.
QMCONFIG=/dev/rawfs
# create the list of devices on which the queue space
# can exist; specify two devices, 80000 and 600
# blocks, respectively
# NOTE: the first one will actually contain the device list
#
# create first device on a raw slice
#
> crdl /dev/rawfs 0 80000
Created device /dev/rawfs, offset 0, size 80000 on /dev/rawfs
#
# create another device on a UNIX file
#
> crdl /home/queues/FS 0 600
Created device /home/queues/FS, offset 0, size 600 on /dev/rawfs
#
# if you want a list of the device list
#
> v Verbose mode is now on
> lidl
universal device index. 0:
name: /dev/rawfs
start: 0
size: 20000
free space map(1 entry used 47 available):
size[1]: 79974 addr[1]: 26
universal device index. 1:
name: /home/queues/FS
start: 0
size: 600
free space map(1 entry used 47 available):
size[1]: 600 addr[1]: 0
#
# create a queue space
#
> qspacecreate
Queue space name: myqueuespace
IPC Key for queue space: 42000
Size of queue space in disk pages: 50000
Number of queues in queue space: 30
Number of concurrent transactions in queue space:
Number of concurrent processes in queue space: 30
Number of messages in queue space: 20000
Error queue name: ERRORQ
Initialize extents (y, n [default=n]): y
Blocking factor [default=16]: 16
....................
#
# open queue space
#
> qopen myqueuespace
#
# use queue space defaults for queue
> qcreate
Queue name: service1
queue order (priority, time, fifo, lifo): fifo
out-of-ordering enqueuing (top, msgid, [default=none]): top,msgid
retries [default=0]: 1
retry delay in seconds [default=0]: 30
High limit for queue capacity warning (b for bytes used, B for blocks used,
% for percent used, m for messages [default=100%]): 100m
Reset (low) limit for queue capacity warning [default=0m]: 50
queue capacity command: /usr/app/bin/mailadmin myqueuespace service1
#
# get out of the program
#
> q
Parent topic: qmadmin Commands
Security
The administrator for the queue must be the same as the Oracle
Tuxedo administrator. The device on which the queue resides must be
owned by the administrator and qmadmin
can only be run
as the administrator for the queue. All IPC resources allocated for
the queue will be owned by the queue administrator and will be
created with mode 0600.
Parent topic: qmadmin Commands
Portability
qmadmin
is supported on any platform on which the
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: qmadmin Commands
Windows Standard I/O
In order to carry out a command that you have configured within a qmadmin()
session, such as the qchange ... Queue capacity command
, the Windows CreateProcess()
function spawns a child process as a DETACHED PROCESS
. This type of process does not have an associated console for standard input/output. Therefore, for instance, if you use standard command line syntax to set the qchange ... Queue capacity command
to run a built-in command (such as dir
or date
) and then pipe or redirect the standard output to a file, the file will be empty when the command completes.
As an example of resolving this problem, suppose that for the qchange ... Queue capacity command
you want to capture date
information in a file using command date /t > x.out
. To accomplish this task interactively, you would proceed as follows:
qmadmin
> qopen yourQspace
> qchange yourQname
> go through all the setups... the threshold queue capacity warning,
and so on
> "Queue capacity command: " cmd /c date /t > x.out
To accomplish this task from a command file, say
yourFile.cmd
, you would add the
command date /t > x.out
to
yourFile.cmd
and then proceed as
follows:
qmadmin
> qopen yourQspace
> qchange yourQname
> go through all the setups... the threshold queue capacity warning,
and so on
> "Queue capacity command: " yourFile.cmd
See Also:
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: qmadmin Commands
rex(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
When invoked without arguments, rex
reads regular expressions from the standard input and writes initialized character arrays to the standard output. Normally, the output is included in a C program. This saves on both execution time and program size. The command rex
compiles the regular expressions on the standard input (normally redirected from an input file) and writes the output to the standard output (normally redirected to an output file).
The input file may contain several patterns, each with the following form:
name
string
[ string
. . .]
Here name
is the C name to be used for the output array and string
is the regular expression enclosed with double quotes. Where more than one string
follows a name
they are concatenated into one string. (Multiple strings
are strictly a formatting convenience.) If double quotes occur in the pattern they need to be preceded by a backslash.
The output may be included in a C program or compiled and later loaded. In the C program that uses the rex
output, rematch(abc,line,0)
applies the regular expression named abc
to line
.
The following is a sample input file:
cname “[a-zA-Z_][a-(3c)-Z0-9_]*”
tn “\\\\(([0-9]{3})$0\\\\)”
“([0-9]{3})$1”
“-”
“([0-9]{4})$2”
The following is the corresponding output:
/* pattern: “[a-aA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*" */
char cname[] = {
040,0,0206,012,0,0210,0141,0172,0210,0101,0132,0137,
... };
/* pattern: "\\\\(([0-9]{3})$0\\\\)([0-9]{3})$1-([0-9]{4})$2" */
char tn[] = {
063,0,050,0202,0225,013,0,03,0206,06,0,0210,060,071,
... };
rex
can be used to try patterns against test data by invoking it with one or more arguments. The first argument is taken as a pattern (regular expression) to be applied to each line of the files whose names are mentioned in the remaining arguments. If no filename arguments are given the standard input is used. The special filename, -
, may be used as an argument to refer to the standard input.
When matching text is found, the line containing the match is printed and the matching portion of the line is underlined. In addition, any text extracted for specified sub-patterns is printed on separate line(s).
For example, the command:
rex '(^| )([0-9]+)$0(|$)'
with input:
... or 200 programmers in one week.
This sentense has 3 erors.
I need 12 bad men.
produces:
... or 200 programmers in one week.
-----
$0 = `200'
This sentense has 3 erors.
---
$0 = `3'
I need 12 bad men.
----
$0 = `12'
Parent topic: rex(1)
Diagnostics
Errors include file open errors, argument errors, and so on, and are self-explanatory.
See Also:
-
regular expression information in tpsubscribe(3c)
Parent topic: rex(1)
tlisten(1)
- Name
- Synopsis
- Description
- Environment Variables
- Link-level Encryption
- SSL Encryption
- Termination
- Recommended Use
- Network Addresses
- Windows Control Panel Applet
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
tlisten [-d device] -l nlsaddr [-u {uid-# | uid-name}][-s][-n
sec_principal_name][-c sec_principal_location][-p sec_principal_passvar]
[-z bits] [-Z bits ][-j jmxaddr][-m jvm_min_mem][-M jvm_max_mem][-S][-C
keyStore][-P keyStorePassword]
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Description
tlisten
is a network-independent listener process that runs as a daemon process on Oracle Tuxedo ATMI application processors and provides remote service connections for other Oracle Tuxedo ATMI processes, for example, tmboot(1). The following command line options are used by tlisten
.
-
-d
device
- Full pathname of the network device. This parameter is optional. For releases prior to version 6.4, it must be used if the underlying network provider requires it.
-
-l nlsaddr
- Network address at which the process listens for connections. The following table lists the TCP/IP address format.
-
-s
- Specifies SSL connection instead of the default LLE connection. In order for the -s option to take effect, the UBBCONFIG(5)
*Resources Section SSL
option must include theSSL
value.
-
-n sec_principal_name
- Specifies the security principal name identification string to be used for authentication purposes by an application running Oracle Tuxedo 10.0 or later software. This parameter may contain a maximum of 511 characters (excluding the terminating NULL character).
-
-c sec_principal_location
- When using an Oracle wallet, this specifies the location of a
directory that contains a subdirectory
wallet.sec_principal_name
where the Oracle Wallet for the principal name specified by the-n
option is located. When using the legacy Tuxedo security credential format, this specifies the location of the file or device where the decryption (private) key for the principal specified insec_principal_name
resides. If the wallet or the private key is in a directory underAPPDIR
, you can also use a relative path to specify this location. -
-p sec_principal_passvar
- Specifies the variable in which the password for the principal
specified in
SEC_PRINCIPAL_NAME
is stored. This parameter may contain a maximum of 31 characters (excluding the terminating NULL character). -
-u {uid-# | uid-name}
-
tlisten
will run as the indicated user. This option supports the start up oftlisten
as part of system initialization byroot
. This option is required if the user runningtlisten
isroot
. Thetlisten
process can therefore be started byroot
, and run asroot
ornon-root
. Non-root
users of thetlisten
command do not need to use the-u
option. Non-root
users can set the-u
option, but it can only be set to their own user ID and is effectively a no-op. Each instantiation of atlisten
process on a processor is capable of supporting all Oracle Tuxedo ATMI applications that use the same application administrator user ID. -
-z [0 | 40 | 56 | 128| 256]
- Specifies the minimum level of encryption required when a
network link is being established between an Oracle Tuxedo
administrative process and
tlisten
.0
means no encryption, while40
,56
,128
, and256
specify the length (in bits) of the encryption key. If this minimum level of encryption cannot be met, link establishment fails. The default value is0
. -
-Z [0 | 40 | 56 | 128| 256]
- Specifies the maximum level of encryption allowed when a
network link is being established between an Oracle Tuxedo
administrative process and
tlisten
.0
means no encryption, while40
,56
,128
, and256
specify the length (in bits) of the encryption key. The default value is128
. -
-j jmxaddr
- This option is used to start the embedded JMX agent.
-
-m jvm_min_mem
- This option specifies the minimal memory size (in MB) that must be allocated for the JVM used by JMX agent. The default value is 200MB.
-
-M jvm_max_mem
- This option specifies the maximum memory size (in MB) that can
be allocated for the JVM used by JMX agent. The value of
jvm_max_mem
cannot be set smaller than the value ofjvm_min_mem
, otherwise the JVM are not created and JMX agent fails to start up. The default value is 500MB. -
-S
- This option specifies SSL connection rather than the default connection between EM OMS/Agent and JMX agent.
-
-C keyStore
- This option specifies the
keyStore
absolute path. -
-P keyStorePassword
- This option specifies the environment variable in which the
password for the key store is stored. This variable is only
usefully when no
tty
is attached.
The tlisten
process authenticates most service
requests. tlisten
reads a file with a list of
passwords, and any process requesting a service must present at
least one of the passwords found in the file. If the
APPDIR
environment variable is set, passwords is
obtained from a file named APPDIR/.adm/tlisten.pw
.
Note:
Once a password is input, thetlisten.pw
file is encrypted. If you want to add a new password, you must use tlistpwd(1).The new password is not echoed on the screen. To remove an existing password, you must delete the corresponding line in tlisten.pw
. You must use the exact same TUXDIR
when creating and using the tlisten
password. Using Tuxedo 11gR1 as a master in MP mode, if you have installed a previous Tuxedo version and did not change the tlisten password after installation, you will receive a security negotiation error message (CMDTUX_CAT:4291
). To resolve this issue, you must add one blank line (in the previous Tux. version) to $TUXDIR/udataobj/tlisten.pw
tail.
If this file is not found, the system will look for
TUXDIR/udataobj/tlisten.pw
, which is created when the
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system is installed. A zero-length or missing
password file disables password checking. When running in this
insecure mode, the tlisten
and any process connecting
to tlisten
will generate a userlog warning
message.
Processes that request services from tlisten
, such
as tmboot
, find the passwords to be used during
authentication in files on their own machines. They use the same
methods as tlisten
to find their password files.
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Environment Variables
-
APPDIR
is set to provide the location of thetlisten
password file. -
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
must be set for SVR4 applications that use shared objects. It must be set toTUXDIR/lib
prior to starting thetlisten
process. Some UNIX systems require different environment variables: for HP-UX systems, use theSHLIB_PATH
environment variable; for AIX, useLIBPATH
. -
TMUSEIPV6
is used to switch the IP version;n|N
is the default IPv4 value,y|Y
sets the IPv6 value. In MP mode, you must setTMUSEIPV6
toy|Y
before executingtlisten
on a slave machine. -
TUXDIR
must be set and exported before executingtlisten
. -
ULOGPFX
can be used to direct the file in which log messages are placed.
Note:
During the installation process, an administrative password file is created. When necessary, the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system searches for this file in the following directories (in the order shown):-
APPDIR/.adm/tlisten.pw
-
TUXDIR/udataobj/tlisten.pw
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Link-level Encryption
If the link-level encryption feature is in operation between
tlisten
and a requesting process such as
tmboot
, link-level encryption will be negotiated and
activated before authentication occurs.
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
SSL Encryption
If the SSL encryption feature is in operation between
tlisten
and a requesting process such as
tmboot
, SSL encryption will be negotiated and
activated before authentication occurs.
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Termination
The only way to stop a tlisten
process with normal
termination is by sending it a SIGTERM
signal.
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Recommended Use
It is recommended that you start one tlisten
process for each application upon system startup. Remember to set
the TUXDIR
and APPDIR
environment
variables before invoking tlisten
.
One alternative method for starting the tlisten
process is to start it manually. The -u
option can be
omitted if the tlisten
process is started by the
application administrator. Duplicate tlisten
command
invocations using the same network address will terminate
automatically and gracefully log an appropriate message.
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Network Addresses
Suppose the local machine on which the tlisten
is
being run is using TCP/IP addressing and is named
backus.company.com
, with address
155.2.193.18
. Further suppose that the port number at
which the tlisten
must accept requests is
2334
. Assume that port number 2334
has
been added to the network services database under the name
bankapp-nlsaddr
. The address specified by the
-l
option can be represented as follows:
-
Note:
IPv6 does not support hexadecimal format.
For a STARLAN network, a recommended address of uname.tlisten
usually yields a unique name.
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
Windows Control Panel Applet
Administrative privileges on a remote Windows machine are
required in order to start a tlisten
process on that
machine through the Control Panel Applet.
See Also:
-
UBBCONFIG(5)
-
tuxenv(5)
-
tlistpwd(1)
- Introducing ATMI Security in Using Security in ATMI Applications
Parent topic: tlisten(1)
tlistpwd(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
tlistpwd(1)
—Used to add or change password(s)
to the system-encrypted tlisten.pw
file.
Parent topic: tlistpwd(1)
Description
Once a password is input, the tlisten.pw
file is
encrypted. If you want to add a new password, you must use
tlistpwd(1)
. It appends the new password to the end of
$TUXDIR/udataobj/tlisten.pw.
To remove an existing
password, you must delete the corresponding line in
tlisten.pw
.
Note:
The new password is not echoed on the screen.You must use the exact same TUXDIR
when creating
and using the tlisten
password.
Parent topic: tlistpwd(1)
Portability
tlistpwd(1)
is available on any platform where the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tlistpwd(1)
Compatibility
tlistpwd(1)
has the following restrictions:
- User password must be less than 80 characters.
- The
$TUXDIR
environment variable must be defined before invoking this command.
Parent topic: tlistpwd(1)
Example(s)
tlistpwd /home/usr/tuxedo10gR3
Please enter the tlisten password:
Please verify the password:
tlistpwd: INFO: Password appended at the end of file
"/home/usr/tuxedo10gR3/udataobj/tlisten.pw".
See Also:
- tlisten(1), Introducing ATMI Security in Using Security in ATMI Applications
Parent topic: tlistpwd(1)
tmadmin(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
With the commands listed in this entry, tmadmin
provides for the inspection and modification of bulletin boards and
associated entities in a uniprocessor, multiprocessor, or networked
environment. The TUXCONFIG
and TUXOFFSET
environment variables are used to determine the location and offset
at which the Oracle Tuxedo configuration file is
loaded.tmadmin
supports the following options:
-
-c
- If
tmadmin
is invoked with the-c
option, it enters configuration mode. The only valid commands aredefault
,echo
,help
,quit
,verbose
,livtoc
,crdl
,lidl
,dsdl
,indl
, anddumptlog
.tmadmin
may be invoked in this mode on any node, including inactive nodes. A node is considered active iftmadmin
can join the application as an administrative process or client (via a runningBBL
). -
-r
- The
-r
option instructstmadmin
to enter the bulletin board as a client instead of as the administrator; in other words, it requests read-only access. This option is useful if you want to leave the administrator slot unoccupied. -
-v
- The
-v
option causestmadmin
to display the Oracle Tuxedo version number and license number. After printing out the information,tmadmin
exits. If the-v
option is entered with either of the other two options, the others are ignored; only the information requested by the-v
option is displayed.
Normally, tmadmin
may be run on any active node within an active application. If it is run on an active node that is partitioned or if there is no NLS available for the master node, commands are limited to read-only access to the local bulletin board. These command include bbls
, bbparms
, bbstat
, default
, dump
, dumptlog
, echo
, help
, interfaceparms, printactiveobject,printclient
, printinterface, printfactory,printnet
, printqueue
, printroute,printserver
, printservice
, printtrans
, printgroup
, reconnect
, quit
, serverparms
, serviceparms
, and verbose
, in addition to the configuration commands. If the partitioned node is the backup node for the MASTER
(specified as the second entry on the MASTER
parameter in the RESOURCES
section of the configuration file), the master
command is also available to make this node the MASTER
for this part of the partitioned application.
If the application is inactive, tmadmin
can be run
only on the MASTER
processor. In this mode, all of the
configuration mode commands are available plus the
TLOG
commands (crlog
, dslog
,
and inlog
) and boot
.
Once tmadmin
has been invoked, commands may be
entered at the prompt (>
) according to the
following syntax:
command
[
arguments
]
Several commonly occurring arguments can be given defaults via
the default
command. Commands that accept parameters
set via the default
command check default
to see whether a value has been set. If a value has not been set,
an error message is returned.
In a networked or multiprocessor environment, a single bulletin
board can be accessed by setting a default
machine
(the logical
machine
ID
(LMID
) as listed in the
MACHINES
section of the UBBCONFIG
file).
If the default
machine
is set to
all
, all bulletin boards are accessed. If
machine
is set to DBBL
, the
distinguished bulletin board is addressed. The default
machine
is shown as part of the prompt, as in:
MASTER>
.
If
machine
is not set via the
default
command, the DBBL
is addressed
(the local BBL is used in a SHM configuration).
The
machine
value for a command can
generally be obtained from the default
setting
(printserver
is an example). A caution is required
here, however, because some commands (the TLOG
commands, for example) act on devices found through
TUXCONFIG
; a default
setting of
DBBL
or all
results in an error. For some
commands, such as logstart
, you must specify the value
of
machine
on the command line; the value does
not appear as an argument to the -m
option.
Once set, a default remains in effect until the session is
ended, unless changed by another default
command.
Defaults may be overridden by entering an explicit value on the
command line, or unset by entering the value “*”. The
effect of an override lasts for a single instance of the
command.
Output from tmadmin
commands is paginated according
to the pagination command in use (see the description of the
paginate
subcommand later in this entry).
There are some commands that have either verbose or terse
output. The verbose
command can be used to set the
default output level. However, each command (except
boot
, shutdown
, and config
)
takes a -v
or -t
option to turn on
verbose or terse output for that command only. When output is
printed in terse mode, some information (for example,
LMID
or GROUP
name, service name, or
server name) may be truncated. This type of truncation is indicated
by a plus sign, +, at the end of the value. The entire value may be
seen by reentering the command in verbose mode.
Parent topic: tmadmin(1)
tmadmin Commands
Commands may be entered either by their full name or their
abbreviation (as given in parentheses), followed by any appropriate
arguments. Arguments appearing in square brackets, [], are
optional; those in curly braces, {}, indicate a selection from
mutually exclusive options. Note that command line options that do
not appear in square brackets need not appear on the command line
(that is, they are optional) if the corresponding default has been
set via the default
command. Ellipses following a
group of options in curly brackets, {}...
, indicate
that more than one of the options listed may appear on the command
line (at least one must appear).
-
aborttrans (abort) [ -yes ] [-g groupname[-R rmid]] tranindex
- This command must be used with care.
-
advertise (adv) {-q qaddress [ -g groupname ] [-i srvid] | -g groupname -i srvid} [-f SINGLETON|SECONDARYRQ] service[:func]
- Creates an entry in the service table for the indicated
service.
service
may be mapped onto a functionfunc
. Ifqaddress
is not specified, bothgroupname
andsrvid
are required to uniquely identify a server. If thisservice
is to be added to an MSSQ set, all servers in the set will advertise the service. If all servers in an MSSQ set cannot advertise the service, the advertisement is disallowed. Services beginning with the character ‘.’ are reserved for use by system servers and will fail to be advertised for application servers. -
bbclean (bbc) machine
- Checks the integrity of all accessers of the bulletin board
residing on machine
machine
, and theDBBL
as well.bbclean
gracefully removes dead servers and restarts them if they are marked as restartable. It also removes those resources no longer associated with any processes. As its last step,bbclean
causes theDBBL
to check the status of eachBBL
. If anyBBL
does not respond withinSCANUNIT
seconds, it is marked as partitioned. To clean only the Distinguished bulletin board,machine
must be specified asDBBL
. In SHM mode,bbclean
restarts theBBL
, if it has failed; themachine
parameter is optional. -
bbparms (bbp)
- Prints a summary of the bulletin board’s parameters, such as the maximum number of servers, objects, interfaces, and services.
-
bbsread (bbls) machine
- Lists the IPC resources for the bulletin board on machine
machine
. InSHM
mode, themachine
parameter is optional. Information from remote machines is not available. -
bbstats (bbs)
- Prints a summary of bulletin board statistics. (See also
shmstats
.) -
boot (b) [ options]
- This command is identical to the
tmboot()
command. See tmboot(1) for an explanation of options and restrictions on use. -
broadcast (bcst) [-m machine] [-u usrname] [-c cltname] [text]
- Broadcasts an unsolicited notification message to all selected
clients. The message sent is a typed buffer of the type
STRING
with the data beingtext
.text
may be no more than 80 characters in length. Iftext
is to contain multiple words, it must be enclosed in quotation marks (“
text text
”
). If any parameter is not set (and does not have a default), it is taken to be the wildcard value for that identifier. -
changeload (chl) [-m machine] {-q qaddress [-g groupname] [-i srvid] -s service | -g groupname -i srvid -s service | -I interface [-g groupname]} newload
- Changes the load associated with the specified service or
interface to
newload
. Ifqaddress
is not specified, bothgroupname
andsrvid
must be specified. For CORBA environments,interface
may be specified. Ifmachine
is set toall
or is not set, the change is made on all machines; otherwise, a local change is made on the specifiedmachine
. Local changes are overridden by any subsequent global (or local) changes. -
changemonitor (chmo) [-m machine] [-g groupname] [-i serverid] newspec
- Changes the run-time performance monitoring behavior of
currently executing processes to
newspec
. -
changepriority (chp) [-m machine] {-q qaddress [-g groupname] [-i srvid] -s service | -g groupname -i srvid -s service | -I interface [-g groupname]} newpri
- Changes the dequeuing priority associated with the specified
service or interface to
newpri
. Ifqaddress
is not specified, bothgroupname
andsrvid
must be specified. For CORBA environments,interface
may be specified. Ifmachine
is set toall
or is not set, the change is made on all machines; otherwise, a local change is made on the specifiedmachine
. Local changes are overridden by any subsequent global (or local) changes. -
changetrace (chtr) [-m machine] [-g groupname[-R rmid] [-i srvid [-s service] ] ] newspec
- Changes the run-time tracing behavior of currently executing processes to
newspec
. (See tmtrace(5) for the syntax ofnewspec
.)
Table 1-18 Service-Level Trace Behavior
Server-Level Trace | Service-Level Trace | Service Trace Behavior | Server Trace Behavior |
---|---|---|---|
on | on->off | off | on |
on | off->on | service level format on | on |
off | on->off | off | off |
off | off->on | service level format on | off |
on->off | on | off | off |
on->off | off | off | off |
off->on | on | service level format on | on |
off->on | off | service level format on | on |
-
checktrace (chktr) [-m machine] [-g groupname [-s srvid [-s service] ] ]
- To check the trace specification of a specific service, use the
-g
,-i
, and-s
options. -
changetrantime (chtt) [-m machine] {-q qaddress [-g groupname] - [-i srvid] -s service | -g groupname -i srvid -s service | -I interface [-g groupname]} newtlim
- Changes the transaction timeout value associated with the
specified service or interface to
newtlim
. Ifqaddress
is not specified, bothgroupname
andsrvid
must be specified. For CORBA environments,interface
may be specified. Ifmachine
is set toall
or is not set, the change is made on all machines; otherwise, a local change is made on the specifiedmachine
. Local changes are overridden by any subsequent global (or local) changes. -
committrans (commit) [ -yes ] [-g groupname[-R rmid]] tranindex
- This command must be used with care.
-
config (conf)
- This command is identical to the
tmconfig
command. See tmconfig, wtmconfig(1) for an explanation of its use. -
crdl -b blocks -z config -o configoffset [ -O newdefoffset ] [ newdevice ]
- Creates an entry in the universal device list.
blocks
specifies the number of physical blocks to be allocated on the device. The defaultblocks
value is initialized to 1000 blocks.configoffset
specifies the block number at which space may begin to be allocated. If the-o
option is not given and a default has not been set, the value of the environment variableFSOFFSET
is used. IfFSOFFSET
is not set, the default is 0.config
points to the first device (which contains the device list); it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If the-z
option is not given and a default has not been set, the path named by theFSCONFIG
environment variable is used. Thenewdevice
argument to thecrdl
command, if specified, points to the device being created; it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If this parameter is not given, thenewdevice
defaults to the config device.newdefoffset
specified an offset to the beginning ofnewdevice
. If not specified with the-O
(capital O) option of default, the default is 0 (zero). -
crlog (crlg) -m machine
- Creates the DTP transaction log for the named or default
machine
(it cannot be “DBBL” or “all”). An error is returned if aTLOG
is not defined for the machine on the configuration. This command references theTUXCONFIG
file to determine the Oracle Tuxedo file system containing theTLOG
, the name of theTLOG
in that file system, the offset, and the size (see UBBCONFIG(5)). -
default (d) [-g groupname] [-i srvid] [-m machine] [-u usrname] [-c cltname] [-q qaddress] [-s service] [-b blocks] [-o offset] [-z config] [-a { 0 | 1 | 2}] [-I interface] [-B objectid] [-r routingname]
- Sets the corresponding argument to be the default group name,
server ID, machine, user name, client name, queue address, service
name, device blocks, device offset, or UDL configuration device
path (it must be an absolute pathname starting with /). See
printservice
for information on the-a
option. For CORBA environments, you can also set corresponding arguments to be the default object interface name, object ID, or factory-based routing name. When the objectID parameter is specified (with-B
), the machine argument (-m
) must also be specified. All defaults may be unset by specifying*
as an argument. Ifmachine
has been set to a machine identifier, and later retrievals are to be done from the Distinguished bulletin board,machine
must be set toDBBL
. Unsetting themachine
(-m
*
) is equivalent to setting it toDBBL
. If thedefault
command is entered with no arguments, the current defaults are printed. -
dsdl [ -yes ] -z config [ -o offset ] dlindex
- Destroys an entry found in the universal device list. The
dlindex
argument is the index on the universal device list of the device that is to be removed from the device list. Entry 0 cannot be removed until allVTOC
files and other device list entries are destroyed first (because entry 0 contains the device which holds the device list and table of contents, destroying it also destroys these two tables.)config
points to the device containing the universal device list; it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If the-z
option is not given and a default has not been set, the path named by theFSCONFIG
environment variable is used.offset
specifies an offset intoconfig
. If the-o
option is not given and a default has not been set, the value of the environment variableFSOFFSET
is used. IfFSOFFSET
is not set, the default is 0. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-yes
option is used. -
dslog (dslg) [ -yes ] -m machine
- Destroys the DTP transaction log for the named or default
machine
(it cannot be “DBBL” or “all”). An error is returned if aTLOG
is not defined for the machine, if the application is not inactive, or if outstanding transaction records exist on the log. The term outstanding transactions means that a global transaction has been committed but an end-of-transaction has not yet been written. This command references theTUXCONFIG
file to determine the Oracle Tuxedo file system containing theTLOG
and name of theTLOG
in that filesystem. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-yes
option is specified. -
dump (du) filename
- Dumps the current bulletin board into the file
filename
. -
dumptlog (dl) -z config [ -o offset ] [ -n name ] [-g groupname[-R rmid]] filename
- Dumps a text version of the
TLOG
into the specifiedfilename
. TheTLOG
is located on the specifiedconfig
andoffset
, and has the specifiedname
. If the-n
option is not given and a default has not been set, the name “TLOG” is used.config
points to the device containing the universal device list; it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If the-z
option is not given and a default has not been set, the path named by theFSCONFIG
environment variable is used. -
echo (e) [{off | on}]
- Echoes input command lines when set to
on
. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting isoff
. -
help (h) [{command | all}]
- Prints help messages. If
command
is specified, the abbreviation, arguments, and description for that command are printed.all
causes a description of all commands to be displayed. Omitting all arguments causes the syntax of all commands to be displayed. -
initdl (indl) [ -yes ] -z config [ -o offset ] dlindex
- Re-initializes a device on the device list. The argument
dlindex
is the index of the device on the universal device list of the device that is to be reinitialized. All space on the specified device is freed; this means that any files, etc., stored on the device may be overwritten in the future so this command must be used cautiously. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-yes
option is used.config
points to the device containing the universal device list; it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If the-z
option is not given and a default has not been set, the path named by theFSCONFIG
environment variable is used. The-o
offset
option can be used to specify an offset intoconfig
. If the-o
option is not given and a default has not been set, the value of the environment variableFSOFFSET
is used. IfFSOFFSET
is not set, the default is 0. -
inlog [ -yes ] -m machine
- Re-initializes the DTP transaction log for the named or
default
machine
(it cannot be “DBBL” or “all”). An error is returned if aTLOG
is not defined for the machine or if the application is not inactive. If outstanding transactions exist on theTLOG
, data may be inconsistent across resource managers acting as participants in these transactions since the resource managers may abort the local transaction instead of correctly committing the transaction. This command references theTUXCONFIG
file to determine the Oracle Tuxedo filesystem containing theTLOG
and name of theTLOG
in that filesystem. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-yes
option is specified. -
interfaceparms (ifp) -g groupname-I interface
- Print information about a specific object interface, including the name of the interface, and the load, priority, timeout, and transaction timeout value associated with it. The groupname and interface arguments must be unique. This command is only used in CORBA environments.
-
lidl -z config [ -o offset ] [ dlindex ]
- Prints the universal device list. For each device the following
is listed: the name, the starting block, and the number of blocks
on the device. In verbose mode, a map is printed which shows free
space (starting address and size of free space). If
dlindex
is specified, only the information for that device list entry is printed.config
points to the device containing the universal device list; it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If the-z
option is not given and a default has not been set, the path named by theFSCONFIG
environment variable is used. The-o
offset
option can be used to specify an offset intoconfig
. If the-o
option is not given and a default has not been set, the value of the environment variableFSOFFSET
is used. IfFSOFFSET
is not set, the default is 0. -
livtoc -z config [ -o offset ]
- Prints information for all
VTOC
table entries. The information printed for each entry includes the name of theVTOC
table, the device on which it is found, the offset of theVTOC
table from the beginning of the device and the number of pages allocated for that table.config
points to the device containing the universal device list; it must be an absolute pathname (starting with /). If the-z
option is not given and a default has not been set, the path named by theFSCONFIG
environment variable is used. The-o
offset
option can be used to specify an offset intoconfig
. If the-o
option is not specified, the value of the environment variableFSOFFSET
is used. IfFSOFFSET
is not set, the default is 0. -
loadtlog -m machine filename
- Reads the text version of a
TLOG
from the specifiedfilename
(produced bydumptlog
) into the existingTLOG
for the named ordefault
machine
(it cannot be “DBBL” or “all”). -
logstart machine
- Forces a warm start for the
TLOG
information on the specifiedmachine
. This must normally be done following aloadtlog
and after disk relocation during server group migration. -
master (m) [ -yes ]
- If
master
is run on the backup node when partitioned, the backup node takes over as the acting master node and a DBBL is booted to take over administrative processing. Ifmaster
is run on the master node when the backup node is acting as the master, the DBBL is migrated to the master node, and the backup node is no longer the acting master node. This command prompts for confirmation before proceeding unless the-yes
option is specified. -
migrategroup (migg) [-cancel] group_name
- The
migrategroup
command takes the name of a server group. If the configuration file specifies theMIGRATE
option and an alternate location for the group, all servers ingroup_name
are migrated to the alternate location. Servers must be shut down for migration with the following command:shutdown -R -g groupname
The
-R
option retains server names in the bulletin board so that migration can be done. The migration can be canceled after theshutdown -R
by the following command:migrategroup -cancel groupname
The
-cancel
option deletes the server names from the bulletin board. -
migratemach (migm) [-cancel] machine
- All servers running on the specified
machine
are migrated to their alternate location. Servers must be shut down for migration with the following command:shutdown -R -l machine
When the
migratemachine
command is used, all server groups located onmachine
must have the same alternate location (otherwisemigrategroup
must be used). Migration of anLMID
(that is, machine) that contains Domains gateway servers implies the migration of these gateway servers to the alternateLMID
. Specifying the-cancel
option causes a migration that is already in progress to be canceled. In other words, the servers have been shut down—with thetmshutdown -R
command—but have not yet been migrated. -
paginate (page) [{off | on}]
- Paginates output. If no option is given, the current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The initial setting is on, unless either standard input or standard output is a non-
tty
device. Pagination may be turned on only when both standard input and standard output aretty
devices. -
passwd
- Prompts the administrator for a new application password in an application requiring security.
-
pclean (pcl) machine
-
pclean
first forces abbclean
on the specifiedmachine
to restart or clean up any servers that may require it. Ifmachine
is partitioned, entries for processes and services identified as running onmachine
are removed from all non-partitioned bulletin boards. Ifmachine
is not partitioned, any processes or services that cannot be restarted or cleaned up are removed. -
printclient (pclt) [-m machine] [-u usrname] [-c cltname][-v]
- Prints information for the specified set of client processes. If no arguments or defaults are set, information on all clients is printed. In a multicontexted client,
printclient
produces a separate entry for each context. The-m
,-u
, and-c
options or defaults can be used to restrict the information to any combination of machine, user name, or client name. -
printconn (pc) [-m machine]
- Prints information about conversational connections. The
-m
option or default can be used to restrict the information to connections to or from the specified machine. Amachine
value of “all” or “DBBL” prints information from all machines. -
printactiveobject (pao) [-B objectid] [-m machine]
- Print information about objects that are active in the domain. The information includes the object ID, interface name, service name, program name, group ID, process ID, and reference count. The command accepts an object ID and a machine ID as optional parameters. If no object ID is specified, information for all active objects is printed. If no machine ID is specified, information is provided for all active objects on the machine where the command is issued. Any object ID that contains over 128 characters is displayed as a 40-character, alphanumeric, hash value.
-
printfactory (pf)
- Print information about object factories registered with the factory finder. The information includes the name of the interface, its factory identifier, and attributes of the current factory status. This command takes no arguments. This command is only used in CORBA environments.
-
printgroup (pg) [-m machine] [-g groupname]
- Prints server group table information. The default is to print information for all groups. The
-g
and-m
options or defaults can be used to restrict the information to a combination of group or machine. The information printed includes the server group name, the server group number, primary and alternate LMIDs, and the current location. -
printinterface (pif) [-m machine] [-g groupname] [-I interface]
- Print information about specified object interfaces, including the interface name, queue name, group ID, machine ID, routing name, and the number of requests done by the interface. The command accepts a machine name, group name, and interface name as optional parameters. If a machine name is specified, the number of active objects for the interface is printed. Otherwise, a hyphen (
-
) indicates that the information about active objects is unavailable. This command is only used in CORBA environments. -
printnet (pnw) [ mach_list ]
- Prints network connection information. The default is to print information for all machines. The
printnet
command optionally takes a comma-separated list of machines (LMIDs
) as arguments. If such a list is provided, information is restricted to network connections involving the specified machines. For each machine, the information indicates whether the machine is partitioned. If a machine is not partitioned, information is printed indicating the other machines to which it is connected and counts of messages in and out. -
printqueue (pq) [qaddress]
- Prints queue information for all application and administrative servers. The default is to print information about all queues. The
qaddress
command line or default can be used to restrict information to a specific queue. Output includes the server name and the name of the machine on which the queues reside. If server has a secondary request queue, all queue addresses are listed. -
printroute (pr) [-r routingname]
- Print information about factory-based routing definitions, including routing name, type, field, and ranges. If routingname is not specified, all existing routes are displayed. This commands prints routes for both Oracle TUXEDO data dependent routing and CORBA factory-based routing. The type field in the output displays
FACTORY
for factory-based routing entries andSERVER
for data-dependent routing entries. When information for data-dependent routing entries has been requested in verbose mode, the output includes buffer type and field type. This command is only used in CORBA environments. -
printserver (psr) [-m machine] [-g groupname[-R rmid]] [-i srvid] [-q qaddress]
- Prints information for application and administrative servers. The
-q
,-m
,-g
, and-i
options can be used to restrict the information to any combination of queue address, the secondary request queue address, machine, group, and server. In a multicontexted server,printserver
prints a single entry for all contexts in the server. -
printservice (psc) [-m machine] [-g groupname[-R rmid]] [-i srvid][-a { 0 | 1 | 2 }] [-q qaddress] [-s service]
- Prints information for application and administrative services. The
-q
,-m
,-g
, -i and-s
options can be used to restrict the information to any combination of queue address, machine, group, server or service. -
printtrans (pt) [-g groupname[-R rmid]] [-m machine]
- Prints global transaction table information for either the
specified or the default machine. If
machine
is “all
” or “DBBL
,” then information is merged together from transaction tables at all non-partitioned machines in the application. The command line or defaultgroupname
value can be used to restrict the information to transactions in which the group is a participant (including the coordinator). -
quit (q)
- Terminates the session.
-
reconnect (rco) non-partitioned_machine1 partitioned_machine2
- Initiates a new connection from the non-partitioned machine to
the partitioned machine.
reconnect
forces a new connection from the non-partitioned machine to the partitioned machine. If a connection is already active, it is closed before the reconnect. This may cause in-transit messages to be lost, resulting in transaction timeouts. It is possible for a machine or network connection to be down, but the network interface driver will continue to accept and buffer requests without any error indication to theBRIDGE
. In this case,reconnect
will fail, forcing theBRIDGE
to recognize that the remote machine cannot be reached. Note that in most cases, after network problems are resolved, theBRIDGE
reconnects automatically, making manual intervention (withreconnect
) unnecessary. -
resume (res) {-q qaddress | -g groupname | -i srvid | -s service | -I interface} . . .
- Resumes (unsuspend) services. The
-q
,-g
,-s
,-I
, and-i
options can be used to restrict the resumed services to any combination of queue, group, service, interface (CORBA environments only), and server. (At least one of these options must be specified or have a default.) Thus the following command line provides a shortcut method of unsuspending all services advertised on the queue with the addressservq8
:-
> resume -q servq8
- Once a suspended service is resumed, the offering server is selected as a candidate server for that service, as well as for other (unsuspended) services it may offer. If multiple servers are reading from a single queue, the status of a particular service is reflected in all servers reading from that queue.
-
-
serverparms (srp) -g groupname[-R rmid]-i srvid
- Prints the parameters associated with the server specified by
groupname
andsrvid
for a group. -
Serviceparms (scp) -g groupname -i srvid -s service
- Prints the parameters associated with the service specified by
groupname
,srvid
, andservice
. -
shmstats (sstats) [ ex | app ]
- If
MODEL SHM
is specified in the configuration file,shmstats
can be used to assure more accurate statistics. When entered with no argument,shmstats
returns the present setting of theTMACCSTATS
flag of thebbparms.options
member of the bulletin board structure. This tells you whether statistics presently being gathered are exact or approximate. If the command is entered withex
specified,shmstats
turns on theTMACCSTATS
flag, locks the bulletin board, and zeroes out the counters for server table, queue table, and service table entries. -
shutdown (stop) [options]
- This command is identical to the
tmshutdown()
command.tmshutdown
options can be used to select servers to be stopped. See tmshutdown(1) for an explanation of options and restrictions on use. -
suspend (susp) {-q qaddress | -g groupname | -i srvid | -s service | -I interface} . . .
- Suspends services. The
-q
,-g
,-s
,-I
, and-i
options can be used to restrict the suspended services to any combination of queue, group, service, interface (CORBA environments only), and server (At least one of these options must be specified or have a default.) Thus the following command provides a shortcut method of suspending all services advertised on the queue with the addressservq8
-
tjsreload -g groupname -i srvid [-M modulename]
- Performs a full reload and server module reload to a Java
server.
tjsreload
uses thegroup name
andserver identifier
to locate the target Java server. -
unadvertise (unadv) {-q qaddress [-g groupname] [-i srvid] | -g groupname -i srvid} service
- Removes an entry in the service table for the indicated
service
. Ifqaddress
is not specified, bothgroupname
andsrvid
are required to uniquely identify a server. Specifying either a queue or a particular server on that queue achieve the same results. If thisservice
is to be removed from a multiple server, single queue (MSSQ) set, the advertisement forservice
is removed from all servers reading from that queue. -
verbose (v) [{off | on}]
- Produces output in verbose mode. If no option is given, the
current setting is toggled, and the new setting is printed. The
initial setting is
off
. The-v
(verbose) and-t
(terse) options on individual commands can be used to temporarily override the current setting. -
! shellcommand
- Escapes to the shell and execute
shellcommand
. -
!!
- Repeats previous shell command.
-
# [text]
- Lines beginning with "#" are comment lines and are ignored.
-
<CR>
- Repeats the last command.
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Security
When tmadmin
runs as the administrator, it does not
pass through security since it is already checked to be the
application administrator’s login ID.
The only time that tmadmin
may run as someone other
than the application administrator is if the -r
option
is used to access the application as a client. If such a user
invokes tmadmin
with the -r
option, and
if security is turned on for the application, the application
password is required to access application data. If standard input
is a terminal, tmadmin
prompts the user for the
password with echo turned off on the reply. If standard input is
not a terminal, the password is retrieved from the
APP_PW
environment variable. If this environment
variable is not specified and an application password is required,
tmadmin
fails.
Parent topic: tmadmin Commands
Environment Variables
tmadmin
acts as an application client if the
-r
option is used or if it cannot register as the
application administrator. If this is the case, and if standard
input is not from a terminal, the APP_PW
environment
variable must be set to the application password in a security
application.
Parent topic: tmadmin Commands
Diagnostics
If the tmadmin
command is entered before the system has been booted, the following message is displayed:
TMADMIN_CAT:196: ERROR: The boot mode is only available on the MASTER processor.
If the tmadmin command is entered, with the -c option, some commands are available in this mode. Enter "help" to list all available commands.
If the tmadmin
command is entered, without the -c
option, on an inactive node that is not the MASTER
, the following message is displayed and the command terminates:
Cannot enter boot mode on non-master node.
If an incorrect application password is entered or is not available to a shell script through the environment, a log message is generated and the command terminates, after displaying the following message:
Invalid password entered.
Parent topic: tmadmin Commands
Interoperability
tmadmin
may be run on any node within an active
interoperating application. However, the commands and command-line
arguments available are restricted to those available via
tmadmin
in the release corresponding to the node on
which tmadmin
is running. For example, the
broadcast
, passwd
, and
printclient
commands are not available on Release 4.1
nodes.
Parent topic: tmadmin Commands
Portability
tmadmin
is supported on any platform on which the
Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tmadmin Commands
Notices
The
machine
option has no effect in a
non-networked uniprocessor environment.
See Also:
-
tmboot(1)
,tmloadcf(1)
,tmshutdown(1)
in the Section 1 - Commands compilation(5)
,UBBCONFIG(5)
in the Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tmadmin Commands
tmboot(1)
- Name
- Synopsis
- Description
- Interoperability
- Portability
- Environment Variables
- Link-Level Encryption
- Diagnostics
- Examples
- Notices
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
tmboot [-l lmid] [-g grpname] [-i srvid] [-s aout] [-o sequence]
[-S] [-A] [-b] [-B lmid] [-e command] [-w|-p] [-y] [-g]
[-n] [-c] [-m] [-M] [-d1][-r]
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Description
tmboot
brings up an Oracle Tuxedo application in whole or in part, depending on the options specified. tmboot
can be invoked only by the administrator of the bulletin board (as indicated by the UID
parameter in the configuration file) or by root
. The tmboot
command can be invoked only on the machine identified as MASTER
in the RESOURCES
section of the configuration file, or the backup acting as the MASTER
, that is, with the DBBL
already running (via the master
command in tmadmin(1)). Except, if the -b
option is used; in that case, the system can be booted from the backup machine without it having been designated as the MASTER
.
With no options, tmboot
executes all administrative
processes and all servers listed in the SERVERS
section of the configuration file named by the
TUXCONFIG
and TUXOFFSET
environment
variables. If the MODEL
is MP
, a
DBBL
administrative server is started on the machine
indicated by the MASTER
parameter in the
RESOURCES
section. An administrative server
(BBL
) is started on every machine listed in the
MACHINES
section. For each group in the
GROUPS
section, TMS
servers are started
based on the TMSNAME
and TMSCOUNT
parameters for each entry. All administrative servers are started
followed by servers in the SERVERS
sections. Any
TMS
or gateway servers for a group are booted before
the first application server in the group is booted. The
TUXCONFIG
file is propagated to remote machines as
necessary. tmboot
normally waits for a booted process
to complete its initialization (that is, tpsvrinit()
)
before booting the next process.
Booting a gateway server implies that the gateway advertises its
administrative service, and also advertises the application
services representing the foreign services based on the
CLOPT
parameter for the gateway. If the instantiation
has the concept of foreign servers, these servers are booted by the
gateway at this time.
Booting an LMID
is equivalent to booting all groups
on that LMID
.
Application servers are booted in the order specified by the DEPENDSON
parameter, or SEQUENCE
parameter, or in the order of server entries in the configuration file (see the description in UBBCONFIG(5)). If both DEPENDSON
and SEQUENCE
parameters are specified, the DEPENDSON
parameter takes priority.
If two or more servers in the SERVERS
section of
the configuration file have the same SEQUENCE
parameter, tmboot
may boot these servers in parallel
and will not continue until they all complete initialization. Each
entry in the SERVERS
section can have a
MIN
and MAX
parameter.
tmboot
boots MIN
application servers (the
default is 1 if MIN
is not specified for the server
entry) unless the -i
option is specified; using the
-i
option causes individual servers to be booted up to
MAX
occurrences.
If a server cannot be started, a diagnostic is written on the
central event log (and to the standard output, unless
-q
is specified), and tmboot
continues—except that if the failing process is a
BBL
, servers that depend on that BBL
are
silently ignored. If the failing process is a DBBL
,
tmboot
ignores the rest of the configuration file. If
a server is configured with an alternate LMID
and
fails to start on its primary machine, tmboot
automatically attempts to start the server on the alternate machine
and, if successful, sends a message to the DBBL
to
update the server group section of TUXCONFIG
.
For servers in the SERVERS
section, only CLOPT
, DEPENDSON
, SEQUENCE
, SRVGRP
, and SRVID
are used by tmboot
. Collectively, these are known as the server’s boot parameters. Once the server has been booted, it reads the configuration file to find its run-time parameters.
All administrative and application servers are booted with
APPDIR
as their current working directory. The value
of APPDIR
is specified in the configuration file in
the MACHINES
section for the machine on which the
server is being booted.
On Linux or UNIX, the search path for the server executables is
APPDIR
, followed by TUXDIR/bin
, followed
by /bin
and /usr/bin
, followed by any
PATH
specified in the ENVFILE
for the
MACHINE
.
On Windows, if there is no APPDIR
or
TUXDIR\bin
set in the PATH
,
tmboot
will automatically attach the
APPDIR
or TUXDIR\bin
to the
PATH
string, as a prefix, and set the
PATH
as the search path for the server
executables.
The search path is used only if an absolute pathname is not
specified for the server. Values placed in the server’s
ENVFILE
are not used for the search path.
When a server is booted, the variables TUXDIR
, TUXCONFIG
, TUXOFFSET
, and APPDIR
, with values specified in the configuration file for that machine, are placed in the environment. The environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH
is also placed in the environment of all servers. Its value defaults to $APPDIR:$TUXDIR/lib:/lib:/usr/lib:lib
where lib
is the value of the first LD_LIBRARY_PATH=
line appearing in the machine ENVFILE
. See UBBCONFIG(5)
for a description of the syntax and use of the ENVFILE
. Some UNIX systems require different environment variables: for HP-UX systems, use the SHLIB_PATH
environment variable; for AIX, use LIBPATH
.
The ULOGPFX
for the server is also set up at boot
time based on the parameter for the machine in the configuration
file. If not specified, it defaults to
$APPDIR/ULOG
.
All of these operations are performed before the application
initialization function, tpsvrinit()
, is called.
Many of the command line options of tmboot
serve to
limit the way in which the system is booted and can be used to boot
a partial system. The following options are supported.
-
-l lmid
- For each group whose associated
LMID
parameter islmid
, allTMS
and gateway servers associated with the group are booted and all servers in theSERVERS
section associated with those groups are executed. -
-g grpname
- All
TMS
and gateway servers for the group whoseSRVGRP
parameter isgrpname
are started, followed by all servers in theSERVERS
section associated with that group.TMS
servers are started based on theTMSNAME
andTMSCOUNT
parameters for the group entry. -
-i srvid
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section whoseSRVID
parameter issrvid
are executed. -
-s server name
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section are executed by server name and MIN value. Servers with a MIN=0 value are not executed. This option can also be used to boot TMS and gateway servers; normally this option is used in this way in conjunction with the-g
option. -
-o sequence
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section withSEQUENCE
parametersequence
are executed. -
-S
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section are executed. -
-A
- All administrative servers for machines in the
MACHINES
section are executed. Use this option to guarantee that theDBBL
and allBBL
andBRIDGE
processes are brought up in the correct order. (See also the description of the-M
option.) -
-b
- Boot the system from the
BACKUP
machine (without making this machine theMASTER
). -
-B lmid
- A
BBL
is started on a processor with logical namelmid
. -
-m 1-n
- Temporarily resets the run-time
MIN
values for servers specified with the -s option with a commonMIN
value. For example,-s server1 -m5
, resets all servers named server1 toMIN=5.
The minimum number of severs you can specify with this option is1
, and the maximum is left to user discretion. -
-M
- This option starts administrative servers on the master
machine. If the
MODEL
isMP
, aDBBL
administrative server is started on the machine indicated by theMASTER
parameter in theRESOURCES
section. ABBL
is started on theMASTER
machine, and aBRIDGE
is started if theLAN
option and aNETWORK
entry are specified in the configuration file. -
-d1
- Causes command line options to be printed on the standard
output. Useful when preparing to use
sdb
to debug application services. -
-e command
- Causes
command
to be executed if any process fails to boot successfully.command
can be any program, script, or sequence of commands understood by the command interpreter specified in theSHELL
environment variable. This allows an opportunity to bail out of the boot procedure. Ifcommand
contains white space, the entire string must be enclosed in quotes. This command is executed on the machine on whichtmboot
is being run, not on the machine on which the server is being booted. -
-w
- Informs
tmboot
to boot another server without waiting for servers to complete initialization. This option must be used with caution.BBL
s depend on the presence of a validDBBL
; ordinary servers require a runningBBL
on the processor on which they are placed. These conditions cannot be guaranteed if servers are not started in a synchronized manner. This option overrides the waiting that is normally done when servers have sequence numbers. -
-p number
- All the application servers not using
DEPENDSON
(configured inUBBCONFIG
file), boot in parallel (applications can boot in parallel only when they have no dependencies). "number
" indicates how many servers can start at the same time[0,1024].
On Windows [0,64]. If number =0
, the default is32
. -
-y
- Assumes a
yes
answer to a prompt that asks if all administrative and server processes must be booted. (The prompt appears only when the command is entered with none of the limiting options.) -
-q
- Suppresses the printing of the execution sequence on the
standard output. It implies
-y
. -
-n
- The execution sequence is printed, but not performed.
-
-c
- Minimum IPC resources needed for this configuration are printed.
-
-r
- Enables ART servers to use the system default
PATH
andLD_LIBRARY_PATH
first.
When the -l
, -g
, -i
, -o
, and -s
options are used in combination, only servers that satisfy all qualifications specified are booted. The -l
, -g
, -s
, and -T
options cause TMS
servers to be booted; the -l
, -g
, and -s
options cause gateway servers to be booted; the -l
,
, -g
-i
, -o
, -s
, and -S
options apply to application servers. Options that boot application servers fail if a BBL
is not available on the machine. The -A
, -M
, and -B
options apply only to administrative processes.
The standard input, standard output, and standard error file descriptors are closed for all booted servers.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Interoperability
tmboot
must run on the master node, which in an
interoperating application must be the highest release available.
tmboot
detects and reports configuration file
conditions that would lead to the booting of administrative servers
such as Workstation listeners on sites that cannot support
them.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Portability
tmboot
is supported on any platform on which the
Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Environment Variables
During the installation process, an administrative password file
is created. When necessary, the Oracle Tuxedo system searches for
this file in the following directories (in the order shown):
APPDIR/.adm/tlisten.pw
and
TUXDIR/udataobj/tlisten.pw
. To ensure that your
password file will be found, make sure you have set the
APPDIR
and/or TUXDIR
environment
variables.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Link-Level Encryption
If the link-level encryption feature is in operation between
tmboot
and tlisten
, link-level encryption
will be negotiated and activated first to protect the process
through which messages are authenticated.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Diagnostics
If TUXCONFIG
is set to a non-existent file, two fatal error messages are displayed:
-
error processing configuration file
-
configuration file not found
If tmboot
fails to boot a server, it exits with exit code 1 and the user log must be examined for further details. Otherwise tmboot
exits with exit code 0.
If
is run on an inactive non-master node, a fatal error message is displayed:
tmboot
tmboot cannot run on a non-master node.
If tmboot
is run on an active node that is not the acting master node, the following fatal error message is displayed:
tmboot cannot run on a non acting-master node in an active application.
If the same IPCKEY
is used in more than one TUXCONFIG
file, tmboot
fails with the following message:
Configuration file parameter has been changed since last tmboot
If there are multiple node names in the MACHINES
section in a non-LAN configuration, the following fatal error message is displayed:
Multiple nodes not allowed in MACHINES for non-LAN application.
If tlisten
is not running on the MASTER
machine in a LAN application, a warning message is printed. In this case, tmadmin(1) cannot run in administrator mode on remote machines; it is limited to read-only operations. This also means that the backup site cannot reboot the master site after failure.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Examples
To start only those servers located on the machines logically named CS0
and CS1
, enter the following command:
tmboot -l CS0 -l CS1
To start only those servers named CREDEB
that belong to the group called DBG1
, enter the following command:
tmboot -g DBG1 -s CREDEB1
To boot a BBL
on the machine logically named PE8
, as well as all those servers with a location specified as PE8
, enter the following command.
tmboot -B PE8 -l PE8
To view minimum IPC resources needed for the configuration, enter the following command.
tmboot -c
The following is an example of the output produced by the -c
option:
Ipc sizing (minimum Oracle Tuxedo values only) ...
Fixed Minimums Per Processor
SHMMIN: 1
SHMALL: 1
SEMMAP: SEMMNI
Variable Minimums Per Processor
SEMUME, A SHMMAX
SEMMNU, * *
Node SEMMNS SEMMSL SEMMSL SEMMNI MSGMNI MSGMAP SHMSEG
------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
sfpup 60 1 60 A + 1 10 20 76K
sfsup 63 5 63 A + 1 11 22 76K
where 1 = A = 8.
The number of expected application clients per processor must be added to each MSGMNI
value. MSGMAP
must be twice MSGMNI
. SHMMIN
must always be set to 1.
The minimum IPC requirements can be compared to the parameters set for your machine. See the system administration documentation for your machine for information about how to change these parameters. If the -y
option is used, the display will differ slightly from the previous example.
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
Notices
The tmboot
command ignores the hangup signal (SIGHUP
). If a signal is detected during boot, the process continues.
Minimum IPC resources displayed with the -c
option apply only to the configuration described in the configuration file specified; IPC resources required for a resource manager or for other Oracle Tuxedo configurations are not considered in the calculation.
See Also:
- tmadmin(1), tmloadcf(1), tmshutdown(1), UBBCONFIG(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tmboot(1)
tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
- Name
- Synopsis
- Description
- Input Format
- RESOURCES Section
- MACHINES Section
- GROUPS Section
- SERVERS Section
- SERVICES Section
- NETWORK Section
- ROUTING Section
- WSL Section
- NETGROUPS Section
- NETMAPS Section
- INTERFACES Section
- Security
- Workstation Client
- Environment Variables
- Diagnostics
- Interoperabilty
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
tmconfig
, wtmconfig—
Dynamically
updates and retrieves information about a running Oracle Tuxedo
application, as either a native client or a Workstation client.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Description
tmconfig
is an interactive program that can be used to update some configuration file parameters, or MIB attributes, and to add records to parts of the TUXCONFIG
file while the Oracle Tuxedo application is running. tmconfig
manages a buffer that contains input field values to be added, updated, or retrieved. When an operation is completed, tmconfig
displays output field values and status. The user can update the input buffer using any available text editor.
tmconfig
is an Oracle Tuxedo native client, and wtmconfig
is a Workstation client, as you can see in the output of the tmadmin
/printclient
command sequence. If the application is using the SECURITY
feature, tmconfig
prompts for the application password.
Note:
Because the same functionality is provided by bothtmconfig
and wtmconfig
—the only difference being that tmconfig
is an Oracle Tuxedo native client and wtmconfig
is an Oracle Tuxedo Workstation client—we refer only to tmconfig
throughout most of this reference page. You can assume that the functionality described here is provided by wtmconfig
, as well.
tmconfig
first prompts for the desired section, and then for the desired operation. The prompt for the section appears as follows:
Section: 1) RESOURCES, 2) MACHINES, 3) GROUPS 4) SERVERS 5)SERVICES
6) NETWORK 7) ROUTING q) QUIT 9) WSL 10) NETGROUPS 11) NETMAPS
12) INTERFACES [1]:
The default section appears in square brackets at the end of the prompt.
tmconfig
then prompts for the desired operation:
Operation: 1) FIRST 2) NEXT 3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD 5) UPDATE
6) CLEAR BUFFER 7) QUIT [1]:
The default operation is shown in square brackets at the end of the prompt. To select the default, simply enter RETURN. To select another option, enter the appropriate number and RETURN.
The following operations are currently supported:
-
FIRST
—retrieves the first record from the specified section. No key fields are needed. (Any key fields that are in the input buffer are ignored.) -
NEXT
—retrieves the next record from the specified section, based on the key fields in the input buffer. -
RETRIEVE
—retrieves the indicated record from the specified section by key field(s). -
ADD
—adds the indicated record in the specified section. Any fields not specified (unless required) take their default values as specified in UBBCONFIG(5). The current value for all fields is returned in the output buffer. This operation can be done only by the Oracle Tuxedo system administrator. -
UPDATE
—updates the record specified in the input buffer in the selected section. Any fields not specified in the input buffer remain unchanged. The current value for all fields is returned in the input buffer. This operation can be done only by the Oracle Tuxedo administrator. -
CLEAR BUFFER
—clears the input buffer (all fields are deleted). After this operation,tmconfig
immediately prompts for the section again. -
QUIT
—exits the program gracefully (the client is terminated). A value ofq
for any prompt also exits the program.
For administrator operations, the effective user identifier must match the Oracle Tuxedo administrator user identifier (UID) for the machine on which this program is executed. When a record is updated or added, all default values and validations used by tmloadcf(1) are enforced.
tmconfig
then prompts you to indicate whether or not you want to edit the input buffer:
Enter editor to add/modify fields [n]?
Entering a value of y
puts the input buffer into a temporary file and executes the text editor. The environment variable EDITOR
is used to determine which editor is to be used. The default is ed
. The input format is in field name/field value pairs and is described in the “Input Format” section below. The field names associated with each UBBCONFIG
section are listed in tables in the subsections below. The semantics of the fields and associated ranges, default values, restrictions, and so on, are described in UBBCONFIG(5)
. Note that permissions values are specified in decimal, not octal. In most cases, the field name is the same as the KEYWORD
in the UBBCONFIG
file, prefixed with TA_
.
When the user completes editing the input buffer, tmconfig
reads it. If more than one line occurs for a particular field name, the first occurrence is used and other occurrences are ignored. If any errors occur, a syntax error is printed and tmconfig
prompts you to indicate whether you want to correct the problem:
Enter editor to correct?
If the problem is not corrected (response n
), the input buffer contains no fields. Otherwise, the editor is executed again.
Finally, tmconfig
asks whether the operation must be performed:
Perform operation [y]?
When the operation completes, tmconfig
prints the return value (as in Return value TAOK
), followed by the output buffer fields. The process then begins again with a prompt for the section. All output buffer fields are available in the input buffer unless the buffer is cleared.
Entering a break at any time restarts the interaction at the prompt for the section.
When QUIT
is selected, tmconfig
prompts you to create a backup text version of the configuration:
Unload TUXCONFIG file into ASCII backup [y]?
If you select a backup, tmconfig
prompts for a filename:
Backup filename [UBBCONFIG]?
On success, tmconfig
indicates that a backup was created; otherwise an error is printed.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Input Format
Input packets consist of lines formatted as follows:
fldname fldval
The field name is separated from the field value by one or more tabs.
Lengthy field values can be continued on the next line by having the continuation line begin with one or more tabs (which are dropped when read back into tmconfig
).
Empty lines consisting of a single newline character are ignored.
To enter an unprintable character in the field value or to start a field value with a tab, use a backslash followed by the two-character hexadecimal representation of the desired character (see ASCII(5) in a UNIX reference manual). A space, for example, can be entered in the input data as \20
. A backslash can be entered using two backslash characters. tmconfig
recognizes all input in this format, but the hexadecimal format is most useful for non-printing characters.
- Limitations
- Relationship between tmconfig, UBBCONFIG, and the MIBs
- When Attributes (Fields) Can Be Updated and Who Can Do It
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Limitations
The following are general limitations of the dynamic reconfiguration capability.
- Values for key fields (as indicated in the following sections) may not be modified. If key fields are modified in the editor buffer and the operation is done, a different record will be modified, based on the new values of the key fields. Key fields can be modified, when the system is down, by reloading the configuration file.
- Fields at the
LMID
level cannot be modified while theLMID
is booted; similarly fields at theGROUP
level cannot be modified while theGROUP
is booted. - Many of the
RESOURCES
parameters cannot be updated on a running system. - Dynamic deletions are not supported. Deletions must be done offline.
- If you attempt to update a parameter in the wrong section (for
example, if you try to update the
ENVFILE
parameter in theMACHINES
section while working in theRESOURCES
section), the operation appears to succeed (that is,tmconfig
returnsTAOK
) but the change does not appear in your unloadedUBBCONFIG
file.
Parent topic: Input Format
Relationship between tmconfig, UBBCONFIG, and the MIBs
In early releases of the Oracle Tuxedo system all application configuration was accomplished by editing the UBBCONFIG
file, a text file that contained all the configuration parameters for an application. Users of later releases of the system compiled the UBBCONFIG
file into a binary file known as TUXCONFIG
by running the tmloadcf(1) command. A subsequent release introduced tmconfig
, a command that supports dynamic updating (that is updating of an active system) of various TUXCONFIG
parameters.
A more recent development was the introduction of the Oracle Tuxedo Management Information Bases (MIBs), which redefined Oracle Tuxedo resources into classes and attributes. Along with the MIBs, the Oracle Tuxedo system also provided an administration API that enabled an administrator (or a user) to access and change the attributes of an application programmatically.
With one exception, this entry of the Oracle Tuxedo Command Reference (that is, tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)) provides brief descriptions only of the various classes of the MIBs. The exception is the Network class, for which a detailed description is provided here on tmconfig()
. For details about all other sections, see TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: Input Format
When Attributes (Fields) Can Be Updated and Who Can Do It
One feature of the former tmconfig
tables was a column that contained a value indicating whether a field could be updated. That information is provided in the MIB reference pages, but in a form that requires a little more digging on your part. See the description of Permissions in MIB(5)
. The Permissions columns in MIB tables resemble the read, write, and execute permissions that are used to restrict access to files, but they convey more information and designate more control than simple file permissions. For example, by values in the Permissions columns in MIB tables can indicate whether or not a field can be changed when the system is active.
Study the description in MIB(5) before you attempt to use tmconfig
.
Parent topic: Input Format
RESOURCES Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_DOMAIN
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
The ADD
operation is not valid for this section.
Because there is only one record in this section, the
RETRIEVE
operation is the same as the
FIRST
operation (no key field is required). The
NEXT
operation always returns a record not found.
Changes to TA_LDBAL
, TA_CMTRET
, and
TA_SYSTEM_ACCESS
affect only new clients and servers
that are subsequently booted. TA_SYSTEM_ACCESS
cannot
be changed if NO_OVERRIDE
is specified and any server
entries exist that do not match the specified access type
(PROTECTED
or FASTPATH
). Changes to
TA_NOTIFY
and TA_AUTHSVC
affect only new
clients that are subsequently started.
Updates to parameters other than those listed above do not appear in your unloaded text backup file.
Parent topic: RESOURCES Section
MACHINES Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_MACHINE
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
A machine cannot be added unless LAN
appears in the
OPTIONS
in the RESOURCES
section.
Updates to parameters other than those listed above do not appear in your unloaded text backup file.
Parent topic: MACHINES Section
GROUPS Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_GROUP
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
SERVERS Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_SERVER
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
Parameter changes in the SERVERS
section take
effect the next time that an associated server is booted (and not
restarted). If multiple servers are defined in an MSSQ
set (using TA_RQADDR
), they must have the same
services booted (for example, changes to TA_CLOPT
or
ENVFILE
must not affect the services that are booted
such that they do not match currently booted servers). If
TA_MAX
is changed, automatic spawning of
conversational servers for the new server identifiers is not
performed until one or more servers in the server set are
booted.
Parent topic: SERVERS Section
SERVICES Section
For attributes in this section, see the descriptions of the T_SERVICE
and T_SVCGRP
classes in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
Parameter changes in the SERVICES
section take
effect the next time a server offering the service is booted (and
not restarted). Updates to TA_ROUTINGNAME
are allowed
only if there is no value in the TA_SRVGRP
field or if
the value of that field is NULL
. In this case, the
TA_ROUTINGNAME
attribute is simultaneously updated in
all matching SERVICES
entries. The
TA_ROUTINGNAME
corresponds to the ROUTING
field in the SERVICES
section.
Updates to parameters other than those listed above do not appear in your unloaded text backup file.
Parent topic: SERVICES Section
NETWORK Section
The following table lists the fields in the NETWORK
section.
NETWORK Section | |||
---|---|---|---|
Field Identifier | Field Type | Update | Notes |
TA_LMID
|
String | No | Key |
TA_BRIDGE
|
String | Sys | - |
TA_NADDR
|
String | Sys | Text (ASCII) format (no embedded NULL characters) |
TA_NLSADDR
|
String | Sys | Text (ASCII) format (no embedded NULL characters) |
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
A record cannot be added while the associated LMID
is booted.
No operations can be done on the NETWORK
section
unless
LAN
appears in the OPTIONS
in the RESOURCES
section.
Updates to parameters other than those listed above do not appear in your unloaded text backup file.
Parent topic: NETWORK Section
ROUTING Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_ROUTING
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
The ROUTING
section cannot be updated while the
system is running. New ROUTING
section entries may be
added if three parameters in the RESOURCES
section
that control the size of the bulletin
board—MAXDRT
, MAXRFT
, and
MAXRTDATA
—are set to allow for growth.
Parent topic: ROUTING Section
WSL Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_WSL
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
The T_WSL
class must be used to update the
CLOPT
for Workstation Listener servers, even though
this is available via the SERVER
section.
Parent topic: WSL Section
NETGROUPS Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_WSL
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
NETMAPS Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_NETMAP
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
INTERFACES Section
For attributes in this section, see the description of the T_INTERFACE
class in TM_MIB(5).
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Notes
The T_INTERFACE
class represents configuration and
runtime attributes of CORBA interfaces at both the domain and
server group levels. There are no required parameters for CORBA
interfaces unless you are implementing factory-based routing, a
feature that allows you to distribute processing to specific server
groups.
Parent topic: INTERFACES Section
Security
If tmconfig
is run in a secure application, it
requires an application password to access the application. If the
standard input is a terminal, tmconfig
prompts the
user for the password with echo turned off on the reply. If the
standard input is not a terminal, the password is retrieved from
the APP_PW
environment variable. If this environment
variable is not specified and an application password is required,
tmconfig
fails.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Workstation Client
As a Workstation client, the command is named
wtmconfig
. The UPDATE
and
ADD
commands are not supported; TAEPERM
is returned.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Environment Variables
tmconfig
resets the FIELDTBLS
and
FLDTBLDIR
environment variables to pick up the
${TUXDIR}/udataobj/tpadmin
field table.
TUXDIR
must be set correctly.
APP_PW
must be set to the application password in a
secure application if standard input is not from a terminal.
Before your client can join an Oracle Tuxedo application, you must set several environment variables:
- For
tmconfig
you must set theTUXCONFIG
environment variable. - For
wtmconfig
you must set theWSNADDR
environment variable. You may also have to setWSDEVICE
, depending on the network protocol used by the Oracle Tuxedo system. Which network protocol is used depends, in turn, on the platform on which your application is running. To find out which network protocols are used on your platform, see Appendix A, “Platform Data Sheets,” in the Oracle Tuxedo Installation Guide.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Diagnostics
tmconfig
fails if it cannot allocate a typed
buffer, if it cannot determine the /etc/passwd
entry
for the user, if it cannot become a client process, if it cannot
create a temporary file in /tmp
for editing the input
buffer, or if it cannot reset the FIELDTBLS
or
FLDTBLDIR
environment variable.
The return value printed by tmconfig
after the
completion of each operation indicates the status of the requested
operation. There are three classes of return values.
The following return values indicate a problem with permissions or an Oracle Tuxedo communications error. They indicate that the operation did not complete successfully.
-
[TAEPERM]
- The calling process specified a
TA_UPDATE
orTA_ADD
opcode
but is not running as the Oracle Tuxedo administrator. -
[TAESYSTEM]
- An Oracle Tuxedo error has occurred. The exact nature of the error is written to userlog(3c) .
-
[TAEOS]
- An operating system error has occurred.
-
[TAETIME]
- A blocking timeout occurred. The input buffer is not updated so no information is returned for retrieval operations. The status of update operations can be checked by doing a retrieval on the record that was being updated.
The following return values indicate a problem in doing the
operation itself and generally are semantic problems with the
application data in the input buffer. The string field
TA_STATUS
is set in the output buffer indicating the
problem. The string field TA_BADFLDNAME
is set to the
field name for the field containing the value that caused the
problem (assuming the error can be attributed to a single
field).
-
[TAERANGE]
- A field value is out of range or is invalid.
-
[TAEINCONSIS]
- A field value or set of field values is inconsistently
specified (for example, san existing
RQADDR
value is specified for a differentSRVGRP
andSERVERNAME
). -
[TAECONFIG]
- An error occurred while the
TUXCONFIG
file was being read. -
[TAEDUPLICATE]
- The operation attempted to add a duplicate record.
-
[TAENOTFOUND]
- The record specified for the operation was not found.
-
[TAEREQUIRED]
- A field value is required but is not present.
-
[TAESIZE]
- A field value for a string field is too long.
-
[TAEUPDATE]
- The operation attempted to do an update that is not allowed.
-
[TAENOSPACE]
- The operation attempted to do an update but there was not
enough space in the
TUXCONFIG
file and/or the bulletin board.
The following return values indicate that the operation was
successful, at least at the MASTER
site.
-
[TAOK]
- The operation succeeded. No updates were done to the
TUXCONFIG
file or the bulletin board. -
[TAUPDATED]
- The operation succeeded. Updates were made to the
TUXCONFIG
file and/or the bulletin board. -
[TAPARTIAL]
- The operation succeeded at the
MASTER
site but failed at one or more non-MASTER
sites. The non-MASTER
sites will be marked as invalid or partitioned. See the administrator’s guide for further information.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
Interoperabilty
The UPDATE
and ADD
operations are not
allowed if an Oracle Tuxedo System Release 4.0 or 4.1 node is
booted. These nodes must be shut down before these operations are
performed. When rebooted, they will pick up the changes.
Parent topic: tmconfig, wtmconfig(1)
tmunloadcf Compatibility
When tmunloadcf(1) is run to print entries in the configuration, certain field values are not printed if they are not set (for strings) or 0 (for integers), or if they match the default value for the field. These fields always appear in the output buffer when tmconfig
is used. In this way, it makes it easier for the administrator to retrieve an entry and update a field that previously was not set. The entry will have the field name followed by a tab but no field value.
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Example
In the following example, tmconfig
is used to correct the network address specified on a Workstation Listener server. It happens to be the first entry in the Servers section. The editor used in the example is ed(1)
.
$ EDITOR=ed tmconfig
Section:1) RESOURCES, 2) MACHINES, 3) GROUPS 4) SERVERS 5)SERVICES 6) NETWORK
7) ROUTING q) QUIT 9) WSL 10) NETGROUPS 11) NETMAPS 12) INTERFACES [1]: 4
Operation: 1) FIRST 2) NEXT 3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD 5) UPDATE
6) CLEAR BUFFER 7) QUIT [1]: 1
Enter editor to add/modify fields [n]? <return>
Perform operation [y]? <return>
Return value TAOK
Buffer contents:
TA_OPERATION 4
TA_SECTION 3
TA_SRVID 2
TA_MIN 1
TA_MAX 1
TA_RQPERM 432
TA_RPPERM 432
TA_MAXGEN 1
TA_GRACE 86400
TA_STATUS Operation completed successfully
TA_SRVGRP WDBG
TA_SERVERNAME WSL
TA_CLOPT -A -- -d/dev/tcp -M4 -m2 -x5 -n0x0002fe19c00b6d6b
TA_CONV N
TA_REPLYQ N
TA_RESTART N
Section:1) RESOURCES, 2) MACHINES, 3) GROUPS 4) SERVERS 5)SERVICES 6) NETWORK
7) ROUTING q) QUIT 9) WSL 10) NETGROUPS 11) NETMAPS 12) INTERFACES [4]: <return>
Operation: 1) FIRST 2) NEXT 3) RETRIEVE 4) ADD 5) UPDATE
6) CLEAR BUFFER 7) QUIT [1]: 5
Enter editor to add/modify fields [n]? y
240
/CLOPT/s/6d6b/690E/p
TA_CLOPT -A -- -d/dev/tcp -M4 -m2 -x5 -n0x0002fe19c00b690E
w
240
q
Perform operation [y]? <return>
Return value TAUPDATED
Buffer contents:
TA_OPERATION 1
TA_SECTION 3
TA_SRVID 2
TA_MIN 1
TA_MAX 1
TA_RQPERM 432
TA_RPPERM 432
TA_MAXGEN 1
TA_GRACE 86400
TA_STATUS Update completed successfully
TA_SRVGRP WDBG
TA_SERVERNAME WSL
TA_CLOPT -A -- -d/dev/tcp -M4 -m2 -x5 -n0x0002fe19c00b690E
TA_CONV N
TA_REPLYQ N
TA_RESTART N
Section:1) RESOURCES, 2) MACHINES, 3) GROUPS 4) SERVERS 5)SERVICES 6) NETWORK
7) ROUTING q) QUIT 9) WSL 10) NETGROUPS 11) NETMAPS 12) INTERFACES [1]: q
Unload TUXCONFIG file into ASCII backup [y]? <return>
Backup filename [UBBCONFIG]? <return>
Configuration backed up in UBBCONFIG
$ # boot the changed server
$ tmboot -s WSL -i 2
See Also:
- tmboot(1), tmloadcf(1)
-
userlog(3c)
in the Section 3c - C Functions
Parent topic: tmunloadcf Compatibility
tmipcrm(1)
Name
tmipcrm
—Removes IPC resources allocated by an
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI application on a local machine.
Parent topic: tmipcrm(1)
Description
tmipcrm
cleans up the IPC resources allocated by an
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI application such as shared memory, message
queues, and semaphores. The command is normally run after an
unusual error situation such as a failed shutdown. Under normal
conditions, the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system cleans up all allocated
IPC resources when it is shut down. The IPC resources that are
removed include those used by the core Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system
and the Workstation component.
tmipcrm
works only on the local server machine; it
does not clean up IPC resources on the remote machines in an Oracle
Tuxedo configuration. The name of the TUXCONFIG
file
must be specified, either as the value of the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable or on the command line.
The TUXCONFIG
file must exist and it must be
readable.
Only an administrator or someone with the proper permissions can run this command successfully. The command assumes that it can attach to the shared memory segments that store the bulletin board (BB), and attempts to remove the IPC resources stored in the bulletin board and referenced from it. Such removal attempts may fail due to other conditions on the system. If detected, such failures are reported.
The following options are supported:
Parent topic: tmipcrm(1)
Diagnostics
If the TUXCONFIG
file cannot be found, a fatal error occurs and the following message is displayed:
Cannot open tuxconfig file
If the TUXCONFIG
file cannot be read, a fatal error occurs and the following message is displayed:
Execute permission denied, not application administrator
If an attempt to attach to the bulletin board shared memory fails, a fatal error occurs and the following message is displayed:
Cannot attach to BB!
Parent topic: tmipcrm(1)
Examples
The command generally runs in an interactive mode, and prompts the user for responses to questions when necessary. If the -y
option is specified, tmipcrm
does not prompt the user, but assumes the answer to every question is yes. If the -n
option is specified, tpipcrm
simply displays a list of IPC resources (on stdout
) and exits; no IPC resources are removed.
The following example demonstrates how this command is typically used:
$ tmipcrm /home/user/apps/tuxconfig
Looking for IPC resources in TUXCONFIG file /home/user/apps/tuxconfig
The following IPC resources were found:
Message Queues:
0x2345
0x3456
…
Semaphores:
0x34567
0x45678
…
Shared Memory:
0x45678
0x56789
…
Remove these IPC resources (y/n)?: y
Removing IPC resources … done!
The following example code prints a list of the IPC resources for an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI application on a local machine in a file called ipclist
:
tmipcrm -n /home/user/apps/tuxconfig >ipclist
Parent topic: tmipcrm(1)
tmloadcf(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
tmloadcf
—Parses a UBBCONFIG
file
and load binary TUXCONFIG
configuration file.
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
Description
tmloadcf
reads a file or the standard input that is in UBBCONFIG
syntax, checks the syntax, and optionally loads a binary TUXCONFIG
configuration file. The TUXCONFIG
and (optionally) TUXOFFSET
environment variables point to the TUXCONFIG
file and (optional) offset where the information must be stored. tmloadcf
can be run only on the MASTER
machine, as defined in the RESOURCES
section of the UBBCONFIG
file, unless the -c
or -n
option is specified.
Note:
The pathname specified for theTUXCONFIG
environment variable must match exactly (including case) the pathname specified for the TUXCONFIG
parameter within the MACHINES
section of the UBBCONFIG
file. Otherwise, tmloadcf(1) cannot be run successfully.
tmloadcf
prints a warning message if it finds any section of the UBBCONFIG
file missing, other than a missing NETWORK
section in a configuration for which the LAN
OPTION
is not specified (see UBBCONFIG(5)) or a missing ROUTING
section. If a syntax error is found while parsing the input file, tmloadcf
exits without performing any updates to the TUXCONFIG
file.
The effective user identifier of the person running tmloadcf
must match the UID
, if specified, in the RESOURCES
section of the UBBCONFIG
file.
The -c
option to tmloadcf
causes the program to print a list of the minimum IPC resources needed for this configuration. If RDMA is enabled, this option causes the program to print recommended size of memory for Msgq_daemon
(RCDMSZ). If SHMQ is enabled, this option causes the program to print the recommended minimum SHMQMAXMEM
(SHMQSZ). Resource requirements that vary on a per-node basis are printed for each node in the configuration. The TUXCONFIG
file is not updated.
The -n
option to tmloadcf
causes the program to do only syntax checking of UBBCONFIG
(the text version of the configuration file) without actually updating the TUXCONFIG
file.
After checking the syntax, tmloadcf
checks whether: (a) the file referenced by TUXCONFIG
exists; (b) it is a valid Oracle Tuxedo system file system; and (c) it contains TUXCONFIG
tables. If these conditions are not true, tmloadcf
prompts you to indicate whether you want the command to create and initialize TUXCONFIG
.
Initialize TUXCONFIG file: path [y, q]?
Prompting is suppressed if the standard input or output is not a terminal, or if the -y
option is specified on the command line. Any response other than y
or Y
causes tmloadcf
to exit without creating the configuration file.
If the TUXCONFIG
file is not properly initialized, and you have indicated approval, tmloadcf
creates the Oracle Tuxedo system file system and then creates the TUXCONFIG
tables. If the -b
option is specified on the command line, its argument is used as the number of blocks for the device when creating the Oracle Tuxedo system file system. If the value of the -b
option is large enough to hold the new TUXCONFIG
tables, tmloadcf
uses the specified value to create the new file system; otherwise, tmloadcf
prints an error message and exits. If the -b
option is not specified, tmloadcf
creates a new file system large enough to hold the TUXCONFIG
tables. The -b
option is ignored if the file system already exists.
The -b
option is highly recommended if TUXCONFIG
is a raw device (that is, if it is a device that has not been initialized) and must be set to the number of blocks on the raw device. The -b
option is not recommended if TUXCONFIG
is a regular UNIX file.
If it is determined that the TUXCONFIG
file has already been initialized, tmloadcf
ensures that the system described by that TUXCONFIG
file is not running. If the system is running, tmloadcf
prints an error message and exits.
If the system is not running and a TUXCONFIG
file already exists, tmloadcf
prompts you to confirm that the file must be overwritten:
Really overwrite TUXCONFIG file [y, q]?
Prompting is suppressed if the standard input or output is not a terminal or if the -y
option is specified on the command line. Any response other than y
or Y
causes tmloadcf
to exit without overwriting the file.
The -w
option is highly recommended if you need to set up a large amount of OPENINFO
in UBBCONFIG GROUPS
section and UBBCONFIG RMS
section. With -w
option, all passwords will be acquired automatically from $TUXCONFIG
. Consequently, you no longer need to manually input passwords every time you set up an OPENINFO
; instead, you manually input passwords only when changing passwords at run time.
If $TUXCONFIG
exists and the password in OPENINFO
is correctly defined in the format of ${tuxconfig.a-zA-Z0-9_}
, tmloadcf
prompts you the information as follows and you can input N/n
to continue.
Setting CLOPT -w could reduce your password-inputting times if none openinfo is changed, input [y/Y] to exit and rerun with -w,
or input [N/n] to continue?
Note:
- The
-w
option requires Oracle Tuxedo 12c Release 2 (12.1.3) RP003 or higher. - If you want to change database passwords, do not specify
-w
.
If the SECURITY
parameter is specified in the RESOURCES
section of the configuration file, tmloadcf
flushes the standard input, turns off terminal echo, and prompts the user for an application password, as follows:
Enter Application Password?
Reenter Application Password?
The password is limited to 30 characters. The option to load UBBCONFIG
(the text version of the configuration file) via standard input (rather than a file) cannot be used when the SECURITY
parameter is turned on. If standard input is not a terminal, that is, if the user cannot be prompted for a password (as with a here
file, for example), the APP_PW
environment variable is accessed to set the application password. If the APP_PW
environment variable is not set and standard input is not a terminal, tmloadcf
prints an error message, generates a log message, and fails to load the TUXCONFIG
file.
Assuming no errors, and if all checks have passed, tmloadcf
loads the UBBCONFIG
file into the TUXCONFIG
file. It overwrites all existing information found in the TUXCONFIG
tables.
Note:
Some values are rounded during the load and may not match when they are unloaded. These include but are not limited toMAXRFT
and MAXRTDATA
.
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
Interoperability
tmloadcf
must run on the master node. In an
interoperating application, the master node must be running the
highest release available.
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
Portability
tmloadcf
is supported on any platform on which the
Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
Environment Variables
The environment variable APP_PW
must be set for
applications for which the SECURITY
parameter is
specified and run tmloadcf
with something other than a
terminal as standard input.
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
Examples
To load a configuration file from UBBCONFIG
file BB.shm
, initialized the device with 2000 blocks:
tmloadcf -b2000 -y BB.shm
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
Diagnostics
If an error is detected in the input, the offending line is printed to standard error along with a message indicating the problem. If a syntax error is found in the UBBCONFIG
file or the system is currently running, no information is updated in the TUXCONFIG
file and tmloadcf
exits with exit code 1.
If tmloadcf
is run by a person whose effective user identifier does not match the UID
specified in the UBBCONFIG
file, the following error message is displayed:
*** UID is not effective user ID ***
If tmloadcf
is run on a non-master node, the following error message is displayed:
tmloadcf cannot run on a non-master node.
If tmloadcf
is run on an active node, the following error message is displayed:
tmloadcf cannot run on an active node.
Upon successful completion, tmloadcf
exits with exit code 0. If the TUXCONFIG
file is updated, a userlog
message is generated to record this event.
See Also:
- tmunloadcf(1), UBBCONFIG(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tmloadcf(1)
tmloadrepos(1)
Name
tmloadrepos
- creates or updates the binary Tuxedo
Service Metadata Repository file and loads it with service
parameter information
Parent topic: tmloadrepos(1)
Synopsis
tmloadrepos [-e|-d service1[,...]] [-y] [-i repository_input file] repository_file
Parent topic: tmloadrepos(1)
Description
Use this command to create or update the binary Tuxedo Service Metadata Repository file and load it with service parameter information.
If no repository file exists and no input file is specified, the repository file is created and service parameter information is input from the console (standard input). Standard input is also used if the repository file already exists, but no input file or particular service name is specified.
Note:
tmloadrepos
cannot be used to update, add, or delete service parameter information in a JOLT Repository file.
tmloadrepos
accepts the following options:
-
-i
- When -
i
is specified,tmloadrepos
uses a specific input file to create and load service parameter information into a new metadata repository file or to modify an existing one. -
-e
- If
-e
is specified,tmloadrepos
replaces all pre-existing repository information with the information specified byrepository_input
file. -
-d
- If the
-d
is specified,tmloadrepos
will delete information for the specified service(s) from the repository.-d
cannot be used with the-i
option and cannot use regular expressions to delete particular service information.
Note:
In order to prevent accidental information erasure, the-e
and -d
options prompt for user confirmation unless the -y
option is specified. A confirmation message appears and you must select “Y” to continue or “N” to discontinue editing, adding, or deleting any service information from the metadata repository file.
-
-y
- If
-y
is specified, service information is edited, added, or deleted to the metatdata repository file directly without user confirmation, -
repository_input file
- The
repository_input
file is a text-based file containing service/parameter keywords and their values. Keyword abbreviations are also supported. Both keywords and abbreviations are case sensitive. For a listing of keywords, abbreviations, and values, see Managing The Tuxedo Service Metadata Repository in Setting Up an Oracle Tuxedo Application, Creating the Metadata Repository. -
repository_file
- The
tmloadrepos
created binary file that contains all metadata repository service information
Parent topic: tmloadrepos(1)
Diagnostics
If an error is detected in the input, the offending line is printed to standard error along with a message indicating the problem.
Parent topic: tmloadrepos(1)
Examples
Example 1: A simple tmloadrepos
input file
example.
Listing TMLOADREPOS Input
service=TRANSFER
svcdescription=This service transfers money from one account to another
export=Y
inbuf=FML
outbuf=FML
param=ACCOUNT_ID
type=integer
paramdescription=The withdrawal account is 1st, and the deposit account is 2nd.
access=in
count=2
requiredcount=2
param=SAMOUNT
paramdescription=This is the amount to transfer. It must be greater than zero.
type=string
access=in
param=SBALANCE
paramdescription=The withdrawal account is 1st, and the deposit account is 2nd.
type=string
access=out
count=2
requiredcount=2
param=STATLIN
type=string
access=out
service=LOGIN
svcdescription=This service allows users to log in to the Acme Banking\
Corporation computer systems. Only tellers and trusted administrators may\
make use of this service.
inbuf=VIEW
inview=LOGINS
outview=LOGINR
export=Y
param=user
type=string
access=in
param=passwd
type=string
access=in
param=token
type=integer
access=out
Example 2: An embedded parameter tmloadrepos
input
file.
Listing Embedded Parameter TMLOADREPOS Input
service=DEPOSIT
svcdescription=This service saves money to one account
export=Y
inbuf=FML32
outbuf=FML32
param=USER_INFO
type=fml32
paramdescription=user information of the account
access=in
count=1
requiredcount=1
fldnum=20000
# embedded field
(
param=USERNAME
type=string
paramdescription=user name
size=8
count=1
requiredcount=1
fldnum=20001
param=GENDER
type=string
size=6
count=1
requiredcount=1
fldnum=20002
)
param=ACCOUNT_ID
type=integer
paramdescription=the deposit account
access=in
count=1
requiredcount=1
fldnum=20003
param=SAMOUNT
paramdescription=This is the amount to transfer. It must be greater than zero.
type=string
access=in
fldnum=20004
param=SBALANCE
paramdescription=the deposit account
type=string
access=out
count=1
requiredcount=1
fldnum=20005
param=STATLIN
type=string
access=out
fldnum=20006
See Also:
-
tpgetrepos(3c)
,tpsetrepos(3c)
in Section 3c - C Functions - tmunloadrepos(1)
TMMETADATA(5)
in Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference- Managing The Tuxedo Service Metadata Repository in Setting Up an Oracle Tuxedo Application
Parent topic: tmloadrepos(1)
TMS_rac_refresh(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
TMS_rac_refresh
- Gets list of Oracle Real
Application Clusters (RAC) prepared transactions
Parent topic: TMS_rac_refresh(1)
Description
TMS_rac_refresh
sends the Transaction Manager
Servers (TMS), which are specified by groupname(s) or group ID(s)
and listed in the groupname
parameter, a command to
re-execute the xa_recover()
operation.
TMS_rac_refresh
returns after sending its message to
the TMS. The TMS then asynchronously executes the actual
xa_recover()
. This operation is needed by the Oracle
Real Application Clusters (RAC) software during failover
conditions.
TMS_rac_refresh
is initiated using Oracle Fast
Application Notification (FAN) when an Oracle RAC group fails over
to an alternate server group. There is no need to manually execute
it from the command line.
Note:
TMS_rac_refresh
is used exclusively for Oracle server groups that make use of the RAC feature. For details on configuring Oracle FAN, refer to Oracle 10g documentation.
Parent topic: TMS_rac_refresh(1)
Diagnostics
TMS_rac_refresh
is not normally executed from the
command line. Therefore, any diagnostic messages are written to the
userlog
.
Parent topic: TMS_rac_refresh(1)
tmshutdown(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
tmshutdown
stops the execution of a set of servers or removes the advertisements of a set of services listed in a configuration file. Only the administrator of the bulletin board (as indicated by the UID
parameter in the configuration file) or root
can invoke the tmshutdown
command. tmshutdown
can be invoked only on the machine identified as MASTER
in the RESOURCES
section of the configuration file, or the backup acting as the MASTER
, that is, with the DBBL
already running (via the master
command in tmadmin(1)). An exception to this is the -P
option which is used on partitioned processors (see below).
With no options, tmshutdown
stops all
administrative, TMS
, and gateway servers, and servers
listed in the SERVERS
section of the configuration
file named by the TUXCONFIG
environment variable, and
removes the IPC resources associated with them. For each group, all
servers in the SERVERS
section, if any, are shut down,
followed by any associated gateway servers (for foreign groups) and
TMS
servers. Administrative servers are shut down
last.
Application servers without SEQUENCE
parameters are
shut down first in reverse order of the server entries in the
configuration file, followed by servers with SEQUENCE
parameters that are shut down from high to low sequence number. If
two or more servers in the SERVERS
section of the
configuration file have the same SEQUENCE
parameter,
tmshutdown
may shut down these servers in parallel.
Each entry in the SERVERS
section may have an optional
MIN
and MAX
parameter.
tmshutdown
shuts down all occurrences of a server (up
to MAX
occurrences) for each server entry, unless the
-i
option is specified; using the -i
option causes individual occurrences to be shut down.
If it is not possible to shut down a server, or remove a service advertisement, a diagnostic is written on the central event log (see userlog(3c)). The following is a description of all options:
-
-l lmid
- For each group whose associated
LMID
parameter islmid
, all servers in theSERVERS
section associated with the group are shut down, followed by anyTMS
and gateway servers associated with the group. -
-g grpname
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section associated with the specified group (that is, for which theSRVGRP
parameter is set togrpname
) are shut down, followed by allTMS
and gateway servers for the group. TMS servers are shut down based on theTMSNAME
andTMSCOUNT
parameters for the group entry. For a foreign group, the gateway servers for the associated entry in theHOST
section are shut down based onGATENAME
andGATECOUNT
. Shutting down a gateway implies not only that the process itself is stopped; it also implies that the administrative service for the gateway and all advertised foreign services are unadvertised. -
-i srvid
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section for which theSRVID
parameter is set tosrvid
are shut down. Do not enter a value forSRVID
greater than 30,000; this indicates system processes (that is,TMS
s or gateway servers) that must only be shut down via the-l
or-g
option. -
-s aout
- All servers listed in the
SERVERS
section with the nameaout
are shut down. This option can also be used to shut downTMS
and gateway servers. -
-o sequence
- All servers in the
SERVERS
section for which theSEQUENCE
parameter is set tosequence
are shut down. -
-S
- All servers listed in the
SERVERS
section are shut down. -
-A
- All administrative servers are shut down.
-
-M
- This option shuts down administrative servers on the master
machine. The
BBL
is shut down on theMASTER
machine, and theBRIDGE
is shut down if theLAN
option and aNETWORK
entry are specified in the configuration file. If theMODEL
isMP
, theDBBL
administrative server is shut down. -
-B lmid
- The
BBL
on the processor with the logical namelmid
is shut down. -
-w delay
- Tells
tmshutdown
to suspend all selected servers immediately and waits for shutdown confirmation for onlydelay
seconds before forcing the server to shut down by sending aSIGTERM
and then aSIGKILL
signal to the server. -
-k {TERM | KILL}
-
tmshutdown
suspends all selected servers immediately and forces them to shut down in an orderly fashion (TERM
) or preemptively (KILL
). -
-y
- Assumes a
yes
answer to a prompt that asks whether all administrative and server processes must be shut down. (The prompt appears only when the command is entered with none of the limiting options.) -
-q
- Suppresses the printing of the execution sequence on standard
output. It implies
-y
. -
-n
- The execution sequence is printed, but not performed.
-
-R
- For migration operations only, shuts down a server on the
original processor without deleting its bulletin board entry in
preparation for migration to another processor. The
-R
option must be used with either the-l
or-g
option (for example,tmshutdown -l
lmid
-R
). TheMIGRATE
option must be specified in theRESOURCES
section of the configuration file. -
-r
- With this option, when a server gets the shutdown message from its request queue, it will shut down without draining the messages in its message queue.
-
-c
- Shuts down
BBL
s even if clients are still attached. -
-H lmid
- On a uniprocessor, all administrative and applications servers
on the node associated with the specified
lmid
are shut down. On a multiprocessor (for example, 3B4000), all PEs are shut down, even if only one PE is specified. -
-P lmid
- With this option,
tmshutdown
attaches to the bulletin board on the specifiedlmid
, ensures that thislmid
is partitioned from the rest of the application (that is, that it does not have access to theDBBL
), and shuts down all administrative and application servers. It must be run on the processor associated with thelmid
in theMACHINES
section of the configuration file.
The -l
, -g
, -s
, and
-T
options cause TMS
servers to be shut
down; the -l
, -g
, and -s
options cause gateway servers to be shut down; the -l
,
-g
, -i
, -s
, -o, and
-S
options apply to application servers; the
-A
,
, and -M
-B
options apply only to administrative processes. When the
-l
, -g
, -i
, -o
,
and -s
options are used in combination, only servers
that satisfy all the qualifications specified are shut down.
If the distributed transaction processing feature is being used
such that global transactions are in progress when servers are shut
down, transactions that have not yet reached the point at which a
commit is logged after a precommit are aborted; transactions that
have reached the commit point are completed when the servers (for
example, TMS
) are booted again.
Parent topic: tmshutdown(1)
Interoperability
tmshutdown
must run on the master node. In an
interoperating application the master node must be running the
highest release available. tmshutdown
detects and
reports configuration file conditions that would lead to the
shutting down of Release 4.2 administrative servers on Release 4.1
sites.
Parent topic: tmshutdown(1)
Portability
tmshutdown
is supported on any platform on which
the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tmshutdown(1)
Diagnostics
If tmshutdown
fails to shut down a server or if a fatal error occurs, tmshutdown
exits with exit code 1 and the user log must be examined for further details; otherwise it exits with exit code 0.
If tmshutdown
is run on an active node that is not the acting master node, a fatal error message is displayed:
tmshutdown cannot run on a non acting-master node in an active application.
If shutting down a process would partition active processes from the DBBL
, a fatal error message is displayed:
cannot shutdown, causes partitioning.
If a server has died, the following somewhat ambiguous message is produced.
CMDTUX_CAT:947 Cannot shutdown server GRPID
Parent topic: tmshutdown(1)
Examples
To shut down the entire system and remove all Oracle Tuxedo IPC resources (force it if confirmation is not received in 30 seconds), run the following command:
tmshutdown -w 30
To shut down only those servers located on the machine for which the value of lmid
is CS1
, enter the following command:
tmshutdown -l CS1
Because the -l
option restricts the action to servers listed in the SERVERS
section, the BBL
on CS1
is not shut down.
Parent topic: tmshutdown(1)
Notices
The tmshutdown
command ignores the hangup signal
(SIGHUP
). If a signal is detected during shutdown, the
process continues.
See Also:
- tmadmin(1),tmboot(1), tpkill(1), UBBCONFIG(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tmshutdown(1)
tmunloadcf(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
tmunloadcf
translates the TUXCONFIG
configuration file from the binary representation into text format. This translation is useful for transporting the file in a compact way between machines with different byte orderings and backing up a copy of the file in a compact form for reliability. The text format is described in UBBCONFIG(5).
tmunloadcf
reads values from the
TUXCONFIG
file referenced by the
TUXCONFIG
and TUXOFFSET
environment
variables and writes them to its standard output.
Starting in Oracle Tuxedo release 7.1, passwords can be used for
multiple resources. For example, you can include a password in the
OPENINFO
string for a resource manager. When
tmunloadcf
is run for a TUXCONFIG
configuration file containing a password, the password appears in
an encrypted form in the output. This encrypted form may only be
uploaded back into the system once.
Note:
Some values are rounded during configuration and may not match values set duringtmloadcf
or via the TMIB interface. These include but are not limited to MAXRFT
and MAXRTDATA
.
Parent topic: tmunloadcf(1)
Portability
tmunloadcf
is supported on any platform on which
the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tmunloadcf(1)
Examples
Enter the following command to unload the configuration in
/usr/tuxedo/tuxconfig
into the file
tconfig.backup
.
TUXCONFIG=/usr/tuxedo/tuxconfig tmunloadcf > tconfig.backup
Parent topic: tmunloadcf(1)
Diagnostics
tmunloadcf
checks that: (a) the file referenced by
the TUXCONFIG
and TUXOFFSET
environment
variables exists; (b) it is a valid Oracle Tuxedo system file
system; and (c) it contains TUXCONFIG
tables. If any
of these conditions is not met, tmunloadcf
prints an
error message and exits with error code 1. Upon successful
completion, tmunloadcf
exits with exit code 0.
See Also:
- tmloadcf(1), UBBCONFIG(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tmunloadcf(1)
tmunloadrepos(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
tmunloadrepos
- displays service information or
creates the C pseudocode for tuxedo client side or server side from
the Tuxedo Service Metadata Repository file.
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
Synopsis
tmunloadrepos [-s service_regular_expression1[,...]] [-t|-c|-C|-S|-V output_dir]
[-o output_file] repository_file
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
Description
tmunloadrepos
displays Tuxedo services information
specified in the metadata repository file or generates C pseudocode
for Tuxedo client side or server side from the metadata repository
file.
Note:
tmunloadrepos
can also be used to view Jolt repository files tmunloadrepos
accepts the following options:
-
-s
- If the -s option is specified, output is restricted to services
matching the
service_regular_expression
. Otherwise, information for all services known to the repository is displayed. More than oneservice_regular_expression
can be combined with separator ',' within one string -
-t
- If the
-t
option is specified, output is in plain text format, and is in a format acceptable for input totmloadrepos
. -
-c
- If the
-c
option is specified, output is in the form of C pseudocode needed for a tuxedo client service call to the specified service(s). -
-C
- If the
-C
option is specified, output will be in the form of C pseudocode of a typical standalone tuxedo client. The number of characters of a whole service name included in a tuxedo client cannot exceed 512. -
-S
- If the
-S
option is specified, output will be in the form of C pseudocode of a common tuxedo service implementation skeleton with the input/output buffer specified by the repository file. -
-V output_dir
- If the
-V
option is specified,tmunloadrepos
will generate Tuxedo view files${SERVICENAME}[info.v|info32.v|_infoFML|infoFML32]
describing the FML/FML32 field tables or VIEW/VIEW32 descriptor, which is defined in the metadata repository file. If the input oftmunloadrepos
does not specify a maximum number of occurrences for a field of the VIEW,tmunloadrepos
-V
tmunloadrepos
does specify an unlimited number of occurrences for a field,tmunloadrepos
-V
will generate an error.
The –S, -V, -C, -t
and -c
options are mutually exclusive. If none of these options are
specified, output is in plain text format.
-
-o output_file
- Specifies the output file name. If
-o output_file
is not specified, the standard output will be used. Such-o output_file
is valid only if “-S
”, “-C
”, or “-c
” is specified.
Note:
tmunloadrepos
can be used to display Jolt repository files as well as Tuxedo service metadata repository files.
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
Deprecation
The following tmunloadrepos
command line option is
deprecated in Tuxedo 10.0 release:
-
-w
- If the
-w
option is specified, output is in the form of a WSDL service description. Tuxedo 9.0 or later uses a customized WSDL format based on WSDL specification V2.0 (www.x3.org).
Oracle SALT command utility tmwsdlgen
is the only recommended utility for Tuxedo service WSDL publication. For more information about tmwsdlgen
, see Oracle SALT Documentation.
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
Diagnostics
tmunloadrepos
verifies that the file specified by
repository_file is a valid Tuxedo System metadata repository file.
If the -s option is specified, tmunloadrepos
verifies
that information about one or more services matching the
service_regular_expression is stored in the repository. If any of
these conditions is not met, tmunloadrepos
prints an
error message and exits with error code 1. Upon successful
completion, tmunloadrepos
exits with exit code 0.
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
Mapping Rule for Field Type
Table 1-19 Mapping Rule for Field Type
MIF | FML | FML32 | VIEW | VIEW32 | C |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
STRING | string | string | string | string | char* |
INT | long | long | int | int | int |
FLOAT | float | float | float | float | float |
SHORT | short | short | short | short | short |
LONG | long | long | long | long | long |
DOUBLE | double | double | double | double | double |
CHAR | char | char | char | char | char |
BYTE | char | char | char | char | unsigned char |
XML | N/A | mbstring | N/A | mbstring | char* |
PTR | ptr | ptr | N/A | N/A | char* |
CARRAY | carray | carray | carray | carray | char* |
MBSTRING | N/A | mbstring | N/A | mbstring | char* |
DEC_T | N/A | N/A | dec_t | dec_t | char* |
FML32 | N/A | FML32 | N/A | N/A | - |
VIEW32 | N/A | VIEW32 | N/A | N/A | - |
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
Examples
Example 1:tmunloadrepos -t
Listing Text Output from tmunloadrepos -t
#
# #Generated from Repository file :
/u01/common/patches/qingszha/AtmiSupport/miftest/viewfml
#
######################
# service : TRANSFER #
######################
service=TRANSFER
servicetype=service
export=Y
inbuf=FML32
outbuf=FML32
svcdescription=This service transfers money from one account to another
tuxservice=TRANSFER
param=ACCOUNT_ID
count=2
requiredcount=2
type=integer
access=in
paramdescription=The withdrawal account is 1st, and the deposit account is 2nd.
param=SAMOUNT
count=1
requiredcount=1
type=string
access=in
paramdescription=This is the amount to transfer. It must be greater than zero.
param=SBALANCE
count=2
requiredcount=2
type=string
access=out
paramdescription=The withdrawal account is 1st, and the deposit account is 2nd.
param=STATLIN
count=1
requiredcount=1
type=string
access=out
###################
# service : LOGIN #
###################
service=LOGIN
servicetype=service
export=Y
inbuf=VIEW
outbuf=VIEW
inview=LOGINS
outview=LOGINR
svcdescription=This service allows users to log in to the Acme Banking \
Corporation computer systems. Only tellers and trusted \
administrators may make use of this service.
tuxservice=LOGIN
param=user
count=1
requiredcount=1
type=string
access=in
param=passwd
count=1
requiredcount=1
type=string
access=in
param=token
count=1
requiredcount=1
type=integer
access=out
Example 2: tmunloadrepos
-C
Listing C Pseudocode Output from tmunloadrepos -C
/*
* #Generated from Repository file :
/u01/common/patches/qingszha/AtmiSupport/miftest/viewfml
* #Generated Time : 04/12/12 01:50:08
*/
#include <stdio.h>
#include "userlog.h"
#include "atmi.h"
/**********************/
/* service : TRANSFER */
/**********************/
int
callsvc_TRANSFER()
{
/*
* This service transfers money from one account to
* another
*/
FBFR32 *idata;
FBFR32 *odata;
int in_account_id = 0;
/*char in_samount [<USER_DATA_LENGTH>];*/
char *out_sbalance = NULL;
char *out_statlin = NULL;
long ilen,olen,flags = 0;
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
if ((idata = tpalloc("FML32", NULL, 4096))==NULL) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
if ((odata = tpalloc("FML32", NULL, 4096))==NULL) {
tpfree(idata);
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
/*Fadd32(idata, ACCOUNT_ID, (char *)&in_account_id,
<USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
/*Fadd32(idata, ACCOUNT_ID, (char *)&in_account_id,
<USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
/*Fadd32(idata, SAMOUNT, (char *)&in_samount, <USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
rtn = tpcall("TRANSFER", idata, ilen, &odata, &olen, flags)
/* Code to retrieve fields from odata goes here */
tpfree(idata);
tpfree(odata);
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
return 0;
}
/*******************/
/* service : LOGIN */
/*******************/
int
callsvc_LOGIN()
{
/*
* This service allows users to log in to the Acme Banking
* Corporation computer systems. Only tellers and trusted
* administrators may make use of this service.
*/
struct LOGINS *idata;
struct LOGINR *odata;
/*char in_user [<USER_DATA_LENGTH>];*/
/*char in_passwd [<USER_DATA_LENGTH>];*/
int out_token = 0;
long ilen,olen,flags = 0;
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
if ((idata = tpalloc("VIEW", "LOGINS", 4096))==NULL) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
if ((odata = tpalloc("VIEW", "LOGINR", 4096))==NULL) {
tpfree(idata);
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
/* <idata> View member value setting can be placed here */
idata->user = in_user;
idata->passwd = in_passwd;
rtn = tpcall("LOGIN", idata, ilen, &odata, &olen, flags)
/* Code to retrieve fields from odata goes here */
tpfree(idata);
tpfree(odata);
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
return 0;
}
int
main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
argc = argc;
argv = argv;
/*
* Set the external variable proc_name (defined in userlog.h)
* to be the name of the executable program so that it appears
* in the Tuxedo ULOG entries for the client program.
*/
proc_name = argv[0];
if (tpinit((TPINIT *)NULL) == -1) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
(void)exit(1);
}
if (callsvc_TRANSFER()){
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
}
if (callsvc_LOGIN()){
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
}
(void)tpterm()
return(0);
}
Listing C Pseudocode Output from tmunloadrepos -c
/ *
* #Generated from Repository file :
/u01/common/patches/qingszha/AtmiSupport/miftest/viewfml
* #Generated Time : 04/12/12 01:50:08
*/
/**********************/
/* service : TRANSFER */
/**********************/
int
callsvc_TRANSFER()
{
/*
* This service transfers money from one account to
* another
*/
FBFR32 *idata;
FBF R32 *odata;
int in_account_id = 0;
/*char in_samount [<USER_DATA_LENGTH>];*/
char *out_sbalance = NULL;
char *out_statlin = NULL;
long ilen,olen,flags = 0;
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
if ((idata = tpalloc("FML32", NULL, 4096))==NULL) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
if ((odata = tpalloc("FML32", NULL, 4096))==NULL) {
tpfree(idata);
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
/*Fadd32(idata, ACCOUNT_ID, (char *)&in_account_id,
<USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
/*Fadd32(idata, ACCOUNT_ID, (char *)&in_account_id,
<USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
/*Fadd32(idata, SAMOUNT, (char *)&in_samount, <USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
rtn = tpcall("TRANSFER", idata, ilen, &odata, &olen, flags)
/* Code to retrieve fields from odata goes here */
tpfree(idata);
tpfree(odata);
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
return 0;
}
/*******************/
/* service : LOGIN */
/*******************/
int
callsvc_LOGIN()
{
/*
* This service allows users to log in to the Acme Banking
* Corporation computer systems. Only tellers and trusted
* administrators may make use of this service.
*/
struct LOGINS *idata;
struct LOGINR *odata;
/*char in_user [<USER_DATA_LENGTH>];*/
/*char in_passwd [<USER_DATA_LENGTH>];*/
int out_token = 0;
long ilen,olen,flags = 0;
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
if ((idata = tpalloc("VIEW", "LOGINS", 4096))==NULL) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
if ((odata = tpalloc("VIEW", "LOGINR", 4096))==NULL) {
tpfree(idata);
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
return -1;
}
/* <idata> View member value setting can be placed here */
idata->user = in_user;
idata->passwd = in_passwd;
rtn = tpcall("LOGIN", idata, ilen, &odata, &olen, flags)
/* Code to retrieve fields from odata goes here */
tpfree(idata);
tpfree(odata);
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
return 0;
}
Listing C Pseudocode Output from tmunloadrepos -S
/*
* #Generated from Repository file :
/u01/common/patches/qingszha/AtmiSupport/miftest/viewfml
* #Generated Time : 04/12/12 01:50:24
*/
/**********************/
/* service : TRANSFER */
/**********************/
void
TRANSFER(TPSVCINFO *msg)
{
/*
* This service transfers money from one account to
* another
*/
FBFR32 *idata;
FBFR32 *odata;
int in_account_id = 0;
char *in_samount = NULL;
char *out_sbalance = NULL;
char *out_statlin = NULL;
int counter, numofocc;
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
idata = (FBFR32 *) msg->data;
Fprint32(idata);
if ((odata = tpalloc("FML32", NULL, msg->len))==NULL) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)idata, 0L, 0);
}
if ((numofocc = Foccur32(idata, ACCOUNT_ID)) == -1) {
/*verifying the number of occurrences is within the range specified
in the service definition*/
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
}
if (numofocc == 0) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
}
for (counter = 0; counter < numofocc; counter++) {
/*
* if (Fget32(idata, ACCOUNT_ID, counter, (char *)&in_account_id,
<USER_DATA_LENGTH>) == -1) {
* <error log can be placed here>
* tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
* }
*/
}
if ((numofocc = Foccur32(idata, SAMOUNT)) == -1) {
/*verifying the number of occurrences is within the range specified
in the service definition*/
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
}
if (numofocc == 0) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
}
for (counter = 0; counter < numofocc; counter++) {
/*
* if (Fget32(idata, SAMOUNT, counter, (char *)&in_samount,
<USER_DATA_LENGTH>) == -1) {
* <error log can be placed here>
* tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
* }
*/
}
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
/*Fadd32(odata, SBALANCE, (char *)&out_sbalance, <USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
/*Fadd32(odata, SBALANCE, (char *)&out_sbalance, <USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
/*Fadd32(odata, STATLIN, (char *)&out_statlin, <USER_DATA_LENGTH>);*/
tpreturn(TPSUCCESS, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
}
/*******************/
/* service : LOGIN */
/*******************/
void
LOGIN(TPSVCINFO *msg)
{
/*
* This service allows users to log in to the Acme Banking
* Corporation computer systems. Only tellers and trusted
* administrators may make use of this service.
*/
struct LOGINS *idata;
struct LOGINR *odata;
char *in_user = NULL;
char *in_passwd = NULL;
int out_token = 0;
/* Application business logic can be placed here */
idata = (struct LOGINS *) msg->data;
if ((odata = tpalloc("VIEW", "LOGINR", msg->len))==NULL) {
/*<error log can be placed here>*/
tpreturn(TPFAIL, 0, (char *)idata, 0L, 0);
}
/* Input View <idata> member value getting can be placed here */
in_user = idata->user;
in_passwd = idata->passwd;
/* Output View member value setting can be placed here */
odata->token = out_token;
tpreturn(TPSUCCESS, 0, (char *)odata, 0L, 0);
}
Example 5: tmunloadrepos -V
Listing Generating Tuxedo view files by tmunloadrepos -V
filename:LOGINinfo.v
#Generated from Repository file :
/u01/common/patches/qingszha/AtmiSupport/miftest/viewfml
#Generated Time : 04/12/12 01:50:34
VIEW LOGINS
#type cname fbname count flag size null
#---- ----- ------ ----- ---- ---- ----
string in_user - 1 - - NULL
string in_passwd - 1 - - NULL
END
VIEW LOGINR
int out_token - 1 - - 0
END
filename:TRANSFER_infoFML32
#Generated from Repository file :
/u01/common/patches/qingszha/AtmiSupport/miftest/viewfml
#Generated Time : 04/12/12 03:20:51
*base 1000
#name rel-number type flags comment
#---- ---------- ---- ------ -------
ACCOUNT_ID 1 long - The withdrawal account is 1st, and the deposit account
is 2nd.
SAMOUNT 2 string - This is the amount to transfer. It must be greater
than zero.
SBALANCE 3 string - The withdrawal account is 1st, and the deposit account
is 2nd.
STATLIN 4 string - -
See Also:
-
tpgetrepos(3c)
,tpsetrepos(3c)
in Section 3c - C Functions tmloadrepos(1)
in Section 1 - CommandsTMMETADATA(5)
in Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference- Managing The Tuxedo Service Metadata Repository in Setting Up an Oracle Tuxedo Application
Parent topic: tmunloadrepos(1)
tpacladd(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
Invoking tpacladd
adds a new Access Control List
(ACL) entry to the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI security data files. This
information is used for Oracle Tuxedo ATMI access control to
services, events, and application queues. An Oracle Tuxedo
configuration with SECURITY
set to
USER_AUTH
, ACL
, or
MANDATORY_ACL
must be created before you can run this
command successfully.
The following options are available.
-
-g GID, . . .
- A list of one or more existing group’s integer identifiers or character-string names. This option indicates which groups have access to the named object. If this option is not specified, an entry is added with no groups.
-
-t type
- The type of the object. It can be one of the following:
ENQ
,DEQ
,SERVICE
, orPOSTEVENT
. The default isSERVICE
. -
name
- A unique string of printable characters that specifies the name
of a service, event, or application queue for which access is to be
granted. It may not contain a colon (
:
), pound sign (#
), or a newline (\n
).
- configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1)
- set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file.
tpacladd
must be run on the configuration MASTER
if the application is not active. If the application is active, this command can run on any active node.
Parent topic: tpacladd(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpacladd(1)
Diagnostics
The tpacladd
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpacldel(1), tpaclmod(1), tpgrpadd(1), tpgrpdel(1), tpgrpmod(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpacladd(1)
tpaclcvt(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
tpaclcvt
checks and converts the existing user file
used by one version of AUTHSVR
(the version available
with Oracle Tuxedo Release 5.0) into the format used by Oracle
Tuxedo Release 6.0. It also generates a group file based on
/etc/group
(or a similar file) and converts the
/etc/passwd
file.
The following options are available.
-
-u userfile
- The name of the Oracle Tuxedo user file. If not specified, the user file is not converted.
-
-g groupfile
- The name of the group file, normally
/etc/group
. If not specified, the group file is not converted.
- configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1)
- set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file.
tpaclcvt
must be run on the configuration MASTER
when the application is not active.
Parent topic: tpaclcvt(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
See Also:
- tpgrpadd(1), tpusradd(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpaclcvt(1)
tpacldel(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
Invoking tpacldel
deletes an existing Access
Control List (ACL) entry from the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI security data
files. An Oracle Tuxedo configuration with SECURITY
set to USER_AUTH
, ACL
, or
MANDATORY_ACL
must be created before you can run this
command successfully.
The following options are available.
-
-t type
- The type of the object. It can be one of the following:
ENQ
,DEQ
,SERVICE
, orPOSTEVENT
. If not specified, the default type isSERVICE
. -
name
- Identifier for the existing ACL entry to be deleted.
- configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1)
- set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file.
tpacldel
must be run on the configuration MASTER
if the application is not active. If the application is active, this command can run on any active node.
Parent topic: tpacldel(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpacldel(1)
Diagnostics
The tpacldel
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpacladd(1), tpaclmod(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpacldel(1)
tpaclmod(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
Invoking tpaclmod
modifies an Access Control List
(ACL) entry in the Oracle Tuxedo security data files, replacing the
group identifier list. This information is used for Oracle Tuxedo
ATMI access control to services, events, and application queues. An
Oracle Tuxedo configuration with SECURITY
set to
USER_AUTH
, ACL
, or
MANDATORY_ACL
must be created before you can run this
command successfully.
The following options are available.
-
-g GID, . . .
- A list of one or more existing group’s integer identifiers or character-string names. This option indicates which groups have access to the named object. If this option is not specified, the entry is modified to have no groups.
-
-t type
- The type of the object. It can be one of the following:
ENQ
,DEQ
,SERVICE
, orPOSTEVENT
. The default isSERVICE
. -
name
- An existing ACL name.
- configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1)
- set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file.
tpaclmod
must be run on the configuration MASTER
if the application is not active. If the application is active, this command can run on any active node.
Parent topic: tpaclmod(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpaclmod(1)
Diagnostics
The tpaclmod
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpacladd(1), tpacldel(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpaclmod(1)
tpaddusr(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
This command allows an application administrator to create a UNIX system style password file suitable for use with the Oracle Tuxedo AUTHSVR(5) server. tpaddusr
adds the user usrname
to the password file file
(the file cannot be /etc/passwd
). The administrator is prompted for an initial password to be associated with the user. If necessary, file
is created with permissions 0600. cltname
, if specified, indicates a further qualifier on the password entry. usrname
and/or cltname
may be specified as the asterisk (*
) which is considered a wildcard by AUTHSVR(5)
. If specified, UID
indicates the numeric user identifier to be returned with a successful authentication of the user. If not specified, cltname
and UID
default to *
and -1,
respectively.
Parent topic: tpaddusr(1)
Notices
The cltname
values tpsysadm
and tpsysop
are treated specially by AUTHSVR(5) when authentication requests are processed. These cltname
values are not matched against wildcard cltname
specifications in the password file.
Additionally, regardless of the order of addition to the password file, wildcard entries are considered after explicitly specified values. An authentication request is authenticated against only the first matching password file entry.
Parent topic: tpaddusr(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpaddusr(1)
Compatibility
This command is used to configure users for
SECURITY
USER_AUTH
. For compatibility
with SECURITY
ACL
or
MANDATORY_ACL
(including the ability to migrate to
these security levels), the following restrictions must be
applied.
- Usernames must be unique and must not include the wildcard character.
- User identifiers must be unique. They must be greater than 0 and less than 128K.
- The filename must be
$APPDIR/tpusr
.
These restrictions are enforced by the tpusradd(1) command.
Parent topic: tpaddusr(1)
Examples
The following sequence of command invocations shows how to construct a simple password file.
$ # 1. Add usrname foo with wildcard cltname and no UID
$ tpaddusr foo /home/tuxapp/pwfile
$ # 2. Add usrname foo with cltname bar and UID 100
$ tpaddusr foo /home/tuxapp/pwfile bar 100
$ # 3. Add usrname foo with tpsysadm cltname and no UID
$ tpaddusr foo /home/tuxapp/pwfile tpsysadm
$ # 4. Add wildcard usrname with tpsysop cltname and no UID
$ tpaddusr '*' /home/tuxapp/pwfile tpsysop
$ # 5. Add wildcard usrname with wildcard cltname and no UID
$ tpaddusr '*' /home/tuxapp/pwfile '*'
The following table shows the password file entry (indicated by
the numbers shown above) used to authenticate various requests for
access to the application. N/A
indicates that the
request is disallowed because the password file does not include an
entry against which a match can be attempted.
Usrname Cltname Password Entry
------ ------- -------------
“foo” "bar" 2
"foo" "" 1
"foo" "tpsysadm" 3
"foo" "tpsysop" 4
"guest" "tpsysop" 4
"guest" "bar" 5
"guest" "tpsysadm" N/A
The following is an example SERVERS
section entry
for an instance of AUTHSVR
that works with the
password file generated above.
AUTHSVR SRVGRP=G SRVID=1 RESTART=Y GRACE=0 MAXGEN=2 CLOPT=”-A -- -f /home/tuxapp/pwfile”
See Also:
Parent topic: tpaddusr(1)
tmchgpwd(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
tmchgpwd
changes password for the specified password identifier on Tuxedo at run time. It prompts you to input your new password for the specified password identifier from console as follows:
Password for IDENTIFIER (KEY=key1):
Parent topic: tmchgpwd(1)
Notices
This tool requires Oracle Tuxedo 12c Release 2 (12.1.3) RP003 or higher.
Parent topic: tmchgpwd(1)
Examples
Assume the input from the console is as follows.
Listing Input Example
OPENINFO="Oracle_XA:Oracle_XA+SqlNet=ORCLSLCE04CN04+Acc=P/scott/${tuxconfig.abc}+SesTM=100+LogDir=.+MaxCur=5"
tmchgpwd tuxconfig.abc
Password for IDENTIFIER (KEY= tuxconfig.abc):
Upon success, the output will be as follows:
Listing Output Example
Password for tuxconfig.abc has been changed successfully.
Parent topic: tmchgpwd(1)
tpdelusr(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
This command allows an application administrator to maintain a UNIX system style password file suitable for use with the Oracle Tuxedo AUTHSVR(5) server. tpdelusr
is used to delete the password file entry for the indicated usrname
/ cltname
combination (the file
cannot be /etc/passwd
). cltname
defaults to ‘*
’ if not specified. Wildcards specified for usrname
and/or cltname
match only the corresponding wildcard entry in the password file; they are not expanded to all matching entries.
Parent topic: tpdelusr(1)
Notices
The cltname
values tpsysadm
and tpsysop
are treated specially by AUTHSVR(5) when authentication requests are being processed. These cltname
values are not matched against wildcard cltname
specifications in the password file.
Additionally, regardless of the order in which entries are added to the password file, wildcard entries are considered after explicitly specified values. An authentication request is authenticated against only the first matching password file entry.
Parent topic: tpdelusr(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpdelusr(1)
Compatibility
This command is used to configure users for
SECURITY
USER_AUTH
. For compatibility
with SECURITY
ACL
or
MANDATORY_ACL
(including the ability to migrate to
these security levels), the following restrictions must be
applied.
- User names must be unique and must not include the wild-card character.
- User identifiers must be unique and must be greater than 0 and less than 128K.
- The filename must be
$APPDIR/tpusr
.
These restrictions are enforced by the tpusrdel(1) command.
See Also:
- tpmodusr(1), tpaddusr(1), tpusradd(1), , tpdelusr(1)tpusrmod(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpdelusr(1)
tpgrpadd(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
The tpgrpadd
command creates a new group definition on the system by adding the appropriate entry to the Oracle Tuxedo security data files. This information is used for Oracle Tuxedo system authentication with the AUTHSVR(5) server and for access control. An Oracle Tuxedo configuration with SECURITY
set to USER_AUTH
, ACL
, or MANDATORY_ACL
must be created before you can run this command successfully.
The following options are available.
-
-g GID
- The group identifier for the new group. This group identifier
must be a non-negative decimal integer below 16K.
GID
defaults to the next available (unique) identifier greater than 0. Group identifier 0 is reserved for the “other” group. -
grpname
- A string of printable characters that specifies the name of the
new group. It may not include a pound sign (
#
), comma (,
), colon (:
) or a newline (\n
).
- configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1)
- set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file.
tpgrpadd
must be run on the configuration MASTER
if the application is not active. If the application is active, this command can run on any active node.
Parent topic: tpgrpadd(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpgrpadd(1)
Diagnostics
The tpgrpadd
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpgrpdel(1), tpgrpmod(1), tpusradd(1), tpusrdel(1), tpmodusr(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpgrpadd(1)
tpgrpdel(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
The tpgrpdel
command removes a group definition
from the system by deleting the entry for the relevant group from
the Oracle Tuxedo security data files. It does not, however, remove
the group ID from the user file. An Oracle Tuxedo configuration
with SECURITY
set to USER_AUTH
,
ACL
, or MANDATORY_ACL
must be created
before you can run this command successfully.
The following option is available.
Before running this command you must: (a) configure the
application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1); and
(b) set the TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to
your TUXCONFIG
file. tpgrpdel
must be run
on the configuration MASTER
if the application is not
active. If the application is active, this command can run on any
active node.
Parent topic: tpgrpdel(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpgrpdel(1)
Diagnostics
The tpgrpdel
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpgrpadd(1), tpgrpmod(1), tpusradd(1), tpusrdel(1), tpusrmod(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpgrpdel(1)
tpgrpmod(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
The tpgrpmod
modifies the definition of the
specified group by modifying the appropriate entry to the Oracle
Tuxedo security data files. An Oracle Tuxedo configuration with
SECURITY
set to USER_AUTH
,
ACL
, or MANDATORY_ACL
must be created
before you can run this command successfully.
The following options are available.
-
-g GID
- The new group identifier for the group. This group identifier must be a non-negative decimal integer below 16K. Group identifier 0 is reserved for the “other” group.
-
-n name
- A string of printable characters that specifies the new name of
the group. It may not include a comma (
,
), colon (:
) or a newline (\n
). -
grpname
- The current name of the group to be modified.
- configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1)
- set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file.
tpgrpmod
must be run on the configuration MASTER
if the application is not active. If the application is active, this command can run on any active node.
Parent topic: tpgrpmod(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpgrpmod(1)
Diagnostics
The tpgrpmod
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpgrpadd(1), tpgrpdel(1), tpusradd(1), tpusrdel(1), tpusrmod(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpgrpmod(1)
tpkill(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
tpkill
locks the Bulletin Board and sends
SIGKILL
signal to the specified Tuxedo server(s). This
command ensures the Bulletin Board is in integrity state when
terminating Tuxedo servers. tpkill
must be executed in
an active Tuxedo domain. One or more Tuxedo server process id value
can be specified with this command.
tpkill
works as a Tuxedo native client application
and requires the following environment variables:
TUXDIR
, TUXCONFIG
,
APPDIR
.
See Also:
Parent topic: tpkill(1)
tpldapconf(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
tpldapconf
— a command utility to generate and write the encrypted ldap bind password into the XAUTHSVR
/LAUTHSVR
configuration file.
Parent topic: tpldapconf(1)
Description
tpldapconf
generates the encrypted bind password to the XAUTHSVR
/LAUTHSVR
configuration file. Users must set the LDAP
bind password with this tool.
tpldapconf
has following restrictions:
- User password must be no more than 31 characters.
- The
$TUXDIR
environment variable must be defined before this commend is invoked.
If there is no specified configuration file, for XAUTHSVR
the file $TUXDIR/udataobj/tpldap.xauth
is taken as the default configuration file, for LAUTHSVR
the file $TUXDIR/udataobj/tpldap
is taken as the default configuration file.
If the clear text password are already existed in the configuration file, it will be replaced by encrypted password without user input, otherwise user is prompted to input the clear text password and the encrypted password is appended to configuration file.
Parent topic: tpldapconf(1)
Portability
The tpldapconf
command is only available on non-/WS sites running Tuxedo System/T Release 12.1.1 and above. [-x | -l]
options are only available in Release 12.2.2 and above.
Parent topic: tpldapconf(1)
Diagnostics
The tpldapconf
command exits with a return code of 0 upon successful completion.
Parent topic: tpldapconf(1)
Examples
$tpldapconf –f tpldap.xauth
See Also:
- How to Enable the Extended Security:
-
XAUTHSVR (5)
-
LAUTHSVR (5)
Parent topic: tpldapconf(1)
tpmigldap(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
tpmigldap [-h hostname] [-p port] [-d wls_domain] [-r wls_realm]
[-f user_password] [-b bind_DN] [[-w ldap_adm_password]|
[-c]] [-u tpusr] [-g tpgrp] [-i UID-kw] [-e GID-kw]
Parent topic: tpmigldap(1)
Description
Invoking tpmigldap
adds Tuxedo users and groups to
the WebLogic Server default security database. There is no need to
create the Tuxedo configuration with SECURITY set to USER_AUTH,
ACL, or MANDATORY_ACL before running this command.
The following options are available:
-
-h hostname
- The hostname where the WebLogic Server resides.
-
-p port
- Specifies the WebLogic Administration Console port number.
-
-d wls_domain
- Specifies the WebLogic Server Domain name.
-
-r wls_realm
- Specifies the WebLogic Server security realm name.
-
-f user_password
- The default password setup for every user migrated to WebLogic Server.
-
-b bind_DN
- Specifies the Bind DN, usually the administrator for the WebLogic Server embedded LDAP server.
-
-w ldap_adm_password
- Specifies the password for the administrator of the WebLogic Server embedded LDAP server.
-
-c
- Prompt for the LDAP Administrator password.
-
-u tpusr
- Specifies the pathname for the
tpusr
file. -
-g tpgrp
- Specifies the pathname for the
tpgrp
file. -
-i UID-kw
- Specifies the keyword for identifying Tuxedo UID in WebLogic Server user information.
-
-e GID-kw
- Specifies the keyword for identifying Tuxedo GID in WebLogic Server user information.
Parent topic: tpmigldap(1)
Portability
The tpmigldap
command is only available on non-/WS
sites running Tuxedo System/T Release 8.1 or later.
Parent topic: tpmigldap(1)
Diagnostics
The tpmigldap
command exits with a return code of 0
upon successful completion.
Parent topic: tpmigldap(1)
Examples
$tpmigldap -h proton -c -d wlsdomain -r wlsrealm -b cn=Admin
See Also:
- Setting up
LAUTHSVR
as the Authentication Server in Implementing Single Point Security Administration. -
LAUTHSVR(5)
Parent topic: tpmigldap(1)
tpmodusr(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
This command allows an application administrator to maintain a UNIX system style password file suitable for use with the Oracle Tuxedo system AUTHSVR(5) server. An Oracle Tuxedo configuration with SECURITY
set to USER_AUTH
, ACL
, or MANDATORY_ACL
must be created before you can run this command successfully.
tpmodusr
is used to modify the password for the
indicated user in the password file
file
(the
file cannot be /etc/passwd
). The administrator is
prompted for a new password to be associated with the user.
cltname
defaults to
‘*
’ if not specified. Wildcards specified
for
usrname
and/or
cltname
match only the corresponding wildcard entry in the password file;
they are not expanded to all matching entries.
Parent topic: tpmodusr(1)
Notices
The cltname
values tpsysadm
and tpsysop
are treated specially by AUTHSVR(5) when authentication requests are being processed. These cltname
values are not matched against wildcard cltname
specifications in the password file.
Additionally, regardless of the order in which entries are added
to the password file, wildcard entries are considered
after
explicitly specified values. An
authentication request is authenticated against only the first
matching password file entry.
Parent topic: tpmodusr(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpmodusr(1)
Compatibility
This command is used to configure users for
SECURITY
USER_AUTH
. For compatibility
with SECURITY
ACL
or
MANDATORY_ACL
(including the ability to migrate to
these security levels), the following restrictions must be
applied.
- Usernames must be unique and must not include the wildcard.
- User identifiers must be unique. They must be greater than 0 and less than 128K.
- The filename must be
$APPDIR/tpusr
.
These restrictions are enforced by the tpusrmod(1) command.
See Also:
- tpaddusr(1), tpdelusr(1), tpusradd(1), tpusrdel(1),
tpusrmod(1)
, AUTHSVR(5) - Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpmodusr(1)
tpusradd(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
Invoking tpusradd
adds a new principal (user or domain) entry to the Oracle Tuxedo security data files. This information is used for per-user authentication with the AUTHSVR(5)
server.
Before you can run this command successfully, you must:
- Configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1).
- Set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file. - Set
SECURITY
toUSER_AUTH
,ACL
, orMANDATORY_ACL
.
tpusradd
must be run on the configuration
MASTER
if the application is not active; if active,
this command can run on any active node.
The system file entries created with this command have a limit of 512 characters per line. Specifying long arguments to several options may exceed this limit.
The following options are available.
-
-u UID
- The user identification number.
UID
must be a positive decimal integer below 128K.UID
must be unique within the list of existing identifiers for the application.UID
defaults to the next available (unique) identifier greater than 0. -
-g GID
- An existing group’s integer identifier or character-string name. This option defines the new user’s group membership It defaults to the “other” group (identifier 0).
-
-c client_name
- A string of printable characters that specifies the client name
associated with the user. If specified, it generally describes the
role of the associated user, and provides a further qualifier on
the user entry. It may not contain a colon (
:
) or a newline (\n
). If not specified, the default is the wildcard ‘*
’ which will authenticate successfully for any client name specified. -
usrname
- A string of printable characters that specifies the new login
name of the user. It may not contain a colon (
:
), pound sign (#
), or a newline (\n
). The user name must be unique within the list of existing users for the application.
The administrator is prompted for an initial password to be associated with the user.
See AUTHSVR(5) for further information about per-user authentication and configuring administrator permissions.
Parent topic: tpusradd(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpusradd(1)
Diagnostics
The tpusradd
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
Parent topic: tpusradd(1)
Examples
The following sequence of command invocations shows the construction of a simple user file.
$ # 1. Add usrname foo with cltname bar and UID 100
$ tpusradd -u 100 -c bar foo
$ # 2. Add usrname foo with tpsysadm cltname and no UID
$ tpusradd -c tpsysadm foo
The following table shows the user entry (indicated by the
numbers shown above) used to authenticate various requests for
access to the application and the associated UID and GID.
N/A
indicates that the request is disallowed because
there is no entry in the user file against which a match can be
attempted.
Usrname Cltname Password Entry Uid Gid
------- ------- -------------- --- ---
"foo" "bar" 2 100 0
"foo" "" 1 1 0
"foo" "tpsysadm" 3 0 8192
"guest" "tpsysadm" N/A N/A N/A
The following is an example “SERVERS” section entry
for an instance of AUTHSVR
that works with the user
file generated above.
AUTHSVR SRVGRP=G SRVID=1 RESTART=Y GRACE=0 MAXGEN=2 CLOPT=”-A”
See Also :
- tpgrpadd(1), tpgrpdel(1), tpgrpmod(1), tpusrdel(1), tpusrmod(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpusradd(1)
tpusrdel(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
The tpusrdel
command deletes a principal (user or
domain name) definition from the system. It removes the definition
of the specified user.
usrname
specifies the
existing username to be deleted.
Before you can run this command successfully, you must:
- Configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1).
- Set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file. - Set
SECURITY
toUSER_AUTH
,ACL
, orMANDATORY_ACL
.
tpusradd
must be run on the configuration
MASTER
if the application is not active. If the
application is active, this command can run on any active node.
Parent topic: tpusrdel(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpusrdel(1)
Diagnostics
The tpusrdel
command exits with a return code of
0
upon successful completion.
See Also:
Parent topic: tpusrdel(1)
tpusrmod(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
tpusrmod [-u UID ] [-g GID] [-c client_name] [-l new_login] [-p] usrname
Parent topic: tpusrmod(1)
Description
Invoking tpusrmod
modifies a principal (user or domain) entry to the Oracle Tuxedo security data files. This information is used for Oracle Tuxedo system authentication with the AUTHSVR(5)
server.
Before you can run this command successfully, you must:
- Configure the application, using either the graphical user interface or tmloadcf(1).
- Set the
TUXCONFIG
environment variable to point to yourTUXCONFIG
file. - Set
SECURITY
toUSER_AUTH
,ACL
, orMANDATORY_ACL
.
tpusradd
must be run on the configuration
MASTER
if the application is not active. If the
application is active, this command can run on any active node.
The system file entries created with this command have a limit of 512 characters per line. Specifying long arguments to several options may exceed this limit.
The following options are available.
-
-u UID
- The new user identification number.
UID
must be a positive decimal integer below 128K.UID
must be unique within the list of existing identifiers for the application. -
-g GID
- An existing group’s integer identifier or character-string name. It redefines the user’s group membership.
-
-c client_name
- A string of printable characters that specifies the new client
name for the user. It may not contain a colon (
:
) or a newline (\n
). -
-l new_login
- A string of printable characters that specifies the new login
name of the user. It may not contain a colon (
:
), pound sign (#
), or a newline (\n
). The user name must be unique within the list of existing users for the application. This option also implies the-p
option to reset the password. -
-p
-
tpusrmod
modifies the password for the indicated user. The administrator is prompted for a new password to be associated with the user. -
usrname
- A string of printable characters that specifies the name of an existing user to be modified.
Parent topic: tpusrmod(1)
Portability
This command is available on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo server environment is supported.
Parent topic: tpusrmod(1)
Diagnostics
The tpusrmod
command exits with a return code of 0 upon successful completion.
See Also:
- tpgrpadd(1), tpgrpdel(1), tpgrpmod(1), tpusradd(1), tpusrdel(1), AUTHSVR(5)
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: tpusrmod(1)
txrpt(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
txrpt
analyzes the standard error output of an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system server to provide a summary of service processing time within the server. The report shows the number of times dispatched and average elapsed time in seconds of each service in the period covered. txrpt
takes its input from the standard input or from a standard error file redirected as input. Standard error files are created by servers invoked with the -r
option from the servopts(5) selection; the file can be named by specifying it with the -e
servopts
option. Multiple files can be concatenated into a single input stream for txrpt
. Options to txrpt
have the following meaning.
-
-t
- Orders the output report by total time usage of the services, with those consuming the most total time printed first. If this option is not specified, the report is ordered by total number of invocations of a service.
-
-n names
- Restricts the report to those services specified by
names.
names
is a comma-separated list of service names. -
-d mm/dd
- Limits the report to service requests on the month (
mm
) and day (dd
) specified. The default is the current day. -
-s time
- Restricts the report to invocations starting after the time given by the
time
argument. The format fortime
ishr
[:
min
[:
sec
-
-e time
- Restricts the report to invocations that finished before the specified
time
. The format fortime
is the same as the format of-s
flag.
The report produced by txrpt
covers only a single
day. If the input file contains records from more than one day, the
-d
option controls the day reported on.
Parent topic: txrpt(1)
Notices
Ensure that the ULOGDEBUG
variable is not set to
y
when a server is collecting statistics for analysis
via txrpt
. Debugging messages in the file will be
misinterpreted by txrpt
.
Parent topic: txrpt(1)
Examples
For the following command line:
txrpt -nSVC1 -d10/15 -s11:01 -e14:18 < stderr
The report produced looks like the following:
START AFTER: Thu Oct 15 11:01:00 1992
END BEFORE: Thu Oct 15 14:18:00 1992
SERVICE SUMMARY REPORT
SVCNAME 11a-12n 13p-14p 14p-15p TOTALS
Num/Avg Num/Avg Num/Avg Num/Avg
------ -------- -------- -------- -------
SVC1 2/0.25 3/0.25 1/0.96 6/0.37
------- ------- ------- ------- -------
TOTALS 2/0.25 3/0.25 1/0.96 6/0.37
The above example shows that SVC1
was requested a total of six times within the specified period and that it took an average of 0.37 seconds to process the request.
See Also:
Parent topic: txrpt(1)
ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
- Name
- Synopsis
- Description
- Options
- Input Format
- Processing Model
- Security
- Portability
- Environment Variables
- Diagnostics
- Notices
- Examples
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
ud [-p] [-d delay] [-e error_limit] [-r] [-s sleeptime] [-b timeout] [-t
timeout] [-n] [-u {n | u | j}] [-U usrname] [-C cltname][-S buffersize]
ud32 [options]
wud [options]
wud32 [options]
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Description
ud
reads an input packet from its standard input using Fextread()
(see Fextread, Fextread32(3fml) for details). The packet must contain a field identified as the name of a service. The input packet is transferred to an FML fielded buffer (FBFR
) and sent to the service. If the service that receives the FBFR
is one that adds records to a database, ud
provides a method for entering bulk fielded data into a database known to the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI system.
By using flags (see “Input Format”) to begin the
lines of the input packet, you can use ud
to test
Oracle Tuxedo ATMI services.
By default, after sending the FBFR
to the service,
ud
expects a return FBFR
. The sent and
reply FBFR
s are printed to ud
’s
standard output; error messages are printed to standard error.
ud32
uses FML32 buffers of type
FBFR32
.
wud
and wud32
are versions of
ud
and ud32
built using the Workstation
libraries. On sites that support only Workstation, only the
wud
and wud32
commands are provided.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Options
ud
supports the following options.
-
-p
- Suppresses printing of the fielded buffers that were sent and returned.
-
-d
- Expects a delayed reply for every request.
delay
specifies the maximum delay time, in seconds, before timeout. If timeout occurs, an error message is printed onstderr
. Ifud
receives reply messages for previous requests within the delay time, they are indicated as delayed RTN packets. Hence, it is possible to receive more than one reply packet within a delay time interval. The-d
option is not available forwud
on DOS operating systems. -
-e error_limit
-
ud
stops processing requests when errors exceed the limit specified inerror_limit
. If no limit is specified, the default is 25. -
-r
-
ud
must not expect a reply message from servers. -
-s sleeptime
- Sleeps between sends of input buffers.
sleeptime
is the time, in seconds, of the sleep. -
-b timeout
-
ud
must send blocking requests in non-transaction mode.timeout
is the time, in seconds, before the blocking request is timed out. The -b option is not allowed in combination with the-t
and-d
options. -
-t timeout
-
ud
must send requests in transaction mode.timeout
is the time, in seconds, before the transaction is timed out. The-d
delay
and-r
(no reply) options are not allowed in combination with the-t
option. -
-u {n | u | j}
- Specifies how the request buffer is modified before reading each new packet. The
n
option indicates that the buffer must be re-initialized (treated as new). Theu
option indicates that the buffer must be updated with the reply buffer usingFupdate()
. Thej
option indicates that the reply buffer must be joined with the request buffer usingFojoin()
. (SeeFupdate
,Fupdate32(3fml)
andFojoin
,Fojoin32(3fml)
in Section 3fml - FML Function Reference for details.) -
-n
- Reinitializes the buffer before reading each packet (that is,
treat each buffer as a new buffer). This option is equivalent to
-un
and is maintained for compatibility. -
-U usrname
- Uses
usrname
as the username when joining the application. -
-C cltname
- Uses cltname as the client name when joining the application.
-
-S buffersize
- If the default buffer size is not large enough, the
-S
option can be used to raise the limit. The value ofbuffersize
can be any number up toMAXLONG
.
The -d
delay
and
-r
options are mutually exclusive.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Input Format
Input packets consist of lines formatted as follows:
[
flag
]
fldname
fldval
flag
is optional. If
flag
is not specified, a new occurrence of the
field named by
fldname
with value
fldval
is added to the fielded buffer. If
flag
is specified, it must be one of the
following:
-
+
- Occurrence 0 of
fldname
inFBFR
must be changed tofldval
. -
-
- Occurrence 0 of
fldname
must be deleted fromFBFR
. The tab character is required;fldval
is ignored. -
=
- The value in
fldname
must be changed. In this case,fldval
specifies the name of a field whose value must be assigned to the field named byfldname
. -
#
- The line is treated as a comment; it is ignored.
If
fldname
is the literal value
SRVCNM
,
fldval
is the name of the
service to which FBFR
is to be passed.
Lengthy field values can be continued on the next line by putting a tab at the beginning of the continuation line.
A line consisting only of the newline character ends the input
and sends the packet to ud
.
If an input packet begins with a line consisting of the
character n
, followed by the newline character, the
FBFR
is reinitialized. FBFR
re-initialization can be specified for all packets with the
-un
option on the command line.
To enter an unprintable character in the input packet, use the
escape convention followed by the hexadecimal representation of the
desired character. (For details, see ascii(5)
in a
UNIX reference manual.) An additional backslash is needed to
protect the escape from the shell. A space, for example, can be
entered in the input data as \20
. ud
recognizes all input in this format, but its greatest usefulness is
for non-printing characters.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Processing Model
Initially, ud
reads a fielded buffer from its
standard input and sends it to the service whose name is given by
the
fldval
of the line in which
fldname
equals SRVCNM
. Unless the
-r
option is selected, ud
waits for a
reply fielded buffer. After obtaining the reply, ud
reads another fielded buffer from the standard input. In so doing,
ud
retains the returned buffer as the current buffer.
This means that the lines on the standard input that form the
second fielded buffer are taken to be additions to the buffer just
returned. That is, the default action is for ud
to
maintain a current buffer whose contents are added to by a set of
input lines. The set is delimited by a blank line. ud
may be instructed to discard the current buffer (that is, to
re-initialize its FBFR
structure), either by
specifying the -un
option on the command line, or by
including a line in which the only character is the letter
n
, specified as the first line of an input set.
ud
may be instructed to merge the contents of the
reply buffer into the request buffer by specifying either the
-uu
option (Fupdate
is used) or the
-uj
option (Fojoin
is used).
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Security
If ud
is run in a security application, it requires
an application password to access the application. If standard
input is a terminal, ud
prompts the user for the
password with echo turned off on the reply. However, since
ud
accepts bulk input on standard input, standard
input is typically a file rather than a terminal. In this case, the
password is retrieved from the environment variable
APP_PW
. If this environment variable is not specified
and an application password is required, ud
fails.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Portability
These commands are supported on any platform on which the Oracle Tuxedo ATMI server environment is supported.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Environment Variables
FLDTBLDIR
and FIELDTBLS
must be set
and exported. FLDTBLDIR
must include
$TUXDIR/udataobj
in the list of directories.
FIELDTBLS
must include Usysflds
as one of
the field tables.
APP_PW
must be set to the application password in a
security application if standard input is not from a terminal.
TPIDATA
must be set to the application-specific data
necessary to join the application in a security application with an
authentication server if standard input is not from a terminal.
WSNADDR
, WSDEVICE
, and optionally WSTYPE
must be set if access is from a workstation. See compilation(5) for more details on setting environment variables for client processes.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Diagnostics
ud
fails if it cannot become a client process, if
it cannot create the needed FBFR
s, or if it encounters
a UNIX system error. It also fails if it encounters more than 25
errors in processing a stream of input packets. These can be syntax
errors, missing service names, errors in starting or committing a
transaction, timeouts, and errors in sending the input
FBFR
or in receiving the reply FBFR
.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Notices
The final fielded buffer in the input stream must be terminated by a blank line.
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
Examples
$ud <EOF>
SRVCNM BUY
CLIENT J. Jones
ADDR 21 Valley Road
STOCK AAA
SHARES 100
<CR>
+SRVCNM SELL
+STOCK XXX
+SHARES 300
STOCK YYY
SHARES 150
<CR>
n
SRVCNM BUY
CLIENT T. Smith
ADDR 1 Main Street
STOCK BBB
SHARES 175
<CR>
+SRVCNM SELL
+STOCK ZZZ
+SHARES 100
<CR>
EOF
$
In this example, ud
first sends a fielded buffer to the service BUY
with the CLIENT
field set to J. Jones, the ADDR
field set to 21 Valley Road, the STOCK
field set to AAA
, and the SHARES
field set to 100.
When the fielded buffer is returned from the BUY
service, ud
uses the next set of lines to change SRVCNM
to SELL
, STOCK
to XXX
, and SHARES
to 300
. Also, it creates an additional occurrence of the STOCK
field with value YYY
and an additional occurrence of the SHARES
field with a value of 150. This fielded buffer is then sent to the SELL
service (the new value of the SRVCNM
field).
When SELL
sends back a reply fielded buffer, ud
discards it by beginning the next set of lines with a line containing only the character n. ud
then begins building an entirely new input packet with SRVCNM
set to BUY
, CLIENT
set to T. Smith
, and so on.
See Also:
-
Fextread, Fext
read32(3fml)
in Section 3fml - FML Function Reference compilation(5)
in Section 5 - File Formats, Data Descriptions, MIBs, and System Processes Reference-
ascii(5)
in a UNIX system reference manual - Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using C
- Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using FML
- Administering an Oracle Tuxedo Application at Run Time
Parent topic: ud,ud32, wud,wud32(1)
viewc, viewc32(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Synopsis
viewc [-n] [-d viewdir] [-C] viewfile [viewfile . . . ] [-l]
viewc32 [-n] [-d viewdir] [-C] viewfile [viewfile . . . ][-s][-S][-l]
Parent topic: viewc, viewc32(1)
Description
viewc
is a view compiler program. It takes a source
viewfile and produces:
- A binary file, which is interpreted at run time to effect the
actual mapping of data between
FML
buffers and C structures. - One or more header files.
- Optionally COBOL copy files. (When
viewc
is executed a C compiler must be available.)
viewc32
is used for 32-bit FML. It uses the
FIELDTBLS32
and FLDTBLDIR32
environment
variables.
The
viewfile
is a file containing source
view descriptions. More than one
viewfile
can
be specified on the viewc
command line as long as the
same VIEW
name is not used in more than one
viewfile
.
By default, all views in the
viewfile
are
compiled and two or more files are created: a view object file
(with a .V
suffix) and a C header file (with a
.h
suffix). The name of the object file is
viewfile.V
in the current directory unless an
alternate directory is specified through the -d
option. C header files are created in the current directory.
If the -C
option is specified, one COBOL copy file
is created for each VIEW
defined in the
viewfile
. These copy files are created in the
current directory.
At viewc
compile time, the compiler matches each
fieldid
and field name specified in the
viewfile
with information obtained from the
field table file, and stores mapping information in an object file
for later use. Therefore, it is essential to set and export the
environment variables FIELDTBLS
and
FLDTBLDIR
to point to the related field table file.
For more information on FIELDTBLS
and
FLDTBLDIR
, see Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI
Application Using FML and Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI
Application Using C.
If the viewc
compiler cannot match a field name with its fieldid
because either the environment variables are not set properly or the field table file does not contain the field name, a warning message, Field not found
, is displayed.
With the -n
option, it is possible to create a view
description file for a C structure that is not mapped to an
FML
buffer. Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI
Application Using C discusses how to create and use such an
independent view description file.
The following options are interpreted by viewc
.
-
-n
- Used when compiling a view description file for a C structure that does not map to an FML buffer. It informs the view compiler not to look for FML information.
-
-d viewdir
- Used to specify that the view object file is to be created in a directory other than the current directory.
-
-C
- Used to specify that COBOL copy files are to be created.
-
-s
- Used to make viewc/viewc32 generates COBOL copy file with the
case-sensitive file name, always used along with
-C
option, -
-S
- Used to forbid sorting fields when interpreting viewfile.
-
-l
- Used to specify no memory alignment for viewfile.
Parent topic: viewc, viewc32(1)
Environment Variables
-
CC
-
viewc
normally uses the default C language compilation command to produce the client executable. The default C language compilation command is defined for each supported operating system platform and is defined ascc(1)
for a UNIX system. In order to allow for the specification of an alternate compiler,viewc
checks for the existence of an environment variable namedCC
. IfCC
does not exist inviewc
’s environment, or if it is the string""
,viewc
will use the default C language compiler. IfCC
does exist in the environment, its value is taken to be the name of the compiler to be executed. -
CFLAGS
- The environment variable
CFLAGS
is taken to contain a set of arguments to be passed as part of the compiler command line. IfCFLAGS
does not exist inviewc
’s environment, or if it is the string""
, no compiler command line arguments are added bybuildclient
. Set the size of "long
" type to 4 if you use 32-bit memory mode on 64-bit platforms.
Parent topic: viewc, viewc32(1)
Portability
The output view file is a binary file that is machine and compiler-dependent. It is not possible to generate a view on one machine with a specific compiler and use that view file on another machine type or with a compiler that generates structure offsets differently (for example, with different padding or packing).
The following additional options are recognized.
-
-c { m| b }
- Specifies the C compilation system to be used. The supported
value for this option is
m
for the Microsoft C compiler. The Microsoft C compiler is the default for this option. The-c
option is supported for Windows only. -
-1 filename
- Specifies that pass 1 must be run, and the resulting batch file
called
filename
.bat
must be created. After this file is created, it, must be executed before running pass 2. Using pass 1 and pass 2 increases the size of the views that can be compiled. -
-2 filename
- Specifies that pass 2 must be run to complete processing, using the output from pass 1.
See Also:
- Introduction to FML Functions in Oracle Tuxedo ATMI FML Function Reference
- Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using C
Parent topic: viewc, viewc32(1)
viewcs, viewcs32(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Name
viewcs
, viewcs32
— Generates C#
source and .dll library files for customer-defined viewfile Tuxedo
.NET Workstation Client applications.
Parent topic: viewcs, viewcs32(1)
Synopsis
viewcs [binarydllfile] binaryviewfile [binaryviewfile...]
viewcs32 [binarydllfile] binaryviewfile [binaryviewfile...]
Parent topic: viewcs, viewcs32(1)
Description
viewcs
is a utility used to generate C# source and
.dll library files for customer-defined viewfile. It takes the
viewc
output file (binary viewfile with a
.VV
extension in its file name on DOS/Windows, or a
.V
extension on other platforms) as input and
generates corresponding C# source and .dll library files which
contain classes representing the customer-defined view structures.
If the a binary.dll
file is not given, a .dll library
file is not generated.
Parent topic: viewcs, viewcs32(1)
Remarks
Unlike viewc
and viewc32
,
viewcs
and viewcs32
do not depend on any
environment variables. The only input needed is the binary viewfile
specified in its command line.
See Also:
- Creating Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client Applications in Using the Tuxedo .NET Workstation Client
Parent topic: viewcs, viewcs32(1)
viewdis, viewdis32(1)
Parent topic: Introduction to Oracle Tuxedo Commands
Description
viewdis
disassembles a view object file produced by
the view compiler and displays view information in viewfile format.
In addition, it displays the offsets of structure members in the
associated structure.
One or more
viewobjfiles
(with
a.V
suffix) can be specified on the command line. By
default, the viewobjfile
in the current directory is
disassembled. If this is not found, an error message is
displayed.
Because the information in the
viewobjfile
was obtained from a match of each fieldid
and field
name in the viewfile with information in the field table file, it
is important to set and export the environment variables
FIELDTBLS
and FLDTBLDIR
.
The output of viewdis
looks the same as the
original view description(s), and is mainly used to verify the
accuracy of the compiled object view descriptions.
viewdis32
is used for 32-bit FML. It uses the
FIELDTBLS32
and FLDTBLDIR32
environment
variables.
See Also:
- viewc, viewc32(1)
- Programming an Oracle Tuxedo ATMI Application Using FML
Parent topic: viewdis, viewdis32(1)